Sei sulla pagina 1di 513

SGS Mark

Users Manual

SCANVEC GARMENT SYSTEMS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT


This agreement gives you certain rights and duties regarding the Software Program, the Users Guides and the
copy protection key (the Key) that you are licensing from Scanvec Garment Systems Ltd. (Scanvec Garment
Systems). The Software Program, the Users Guides and the Key will be referred together here as the Licensed
Materials.
1. License grant and termination. Scanvec Garment Systems grants you personal, non-transferable, non-exclusive
license to use the Licensed Materials for the ordinary purposes of your business. If you breach any terms of this
Agreement, this license will immediately terminate and you must promptly return the Licensed Materials to
Scanvec Garment Systems. The Licensed Materials are proprietary products of Scanvec Garment Systems, and
Scanvec Garment Systems retain title to and ownership of the Licensed Materials.
2. Scanvec Garment Systems copyright, etc. no copies or transfer, etc. You acknowledge that the Licensed
Materials are protected by copyrights held by Scanvec Garment Systems parent company. You acknowledge
that Licensed Materials embody trade secrets owned by Scanvec Garment Systems parent company. You may
not copy any part of the Licensed Materials for any purpose. You may not disassemble, decompile, reverse
engineer or otherwise modify, tamper with or make changes to the Licensed Materials under any circumstances.
You may not rent, lease, loan, assign or transfer the Licensed Material to any third party. You may not allow any
third party to use the Licensed Materials or to make copies of them. You may not use the Software Program
without the Key. You may not emulate, duplicate, replace or modify the Key.
3. Warranty, disclaims, remedies. Scanvec Garment Systems warrants that the Media containing the Software
Program (the CDs) are free from defects of materials and workmanship. SCANVEC GARMENT SYSTEMS
DISCLAIM ALL OTHER EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES REGARDING THE CDs AND THE
LICENSED MATERIALS. You agree that your only remedy for any breach of the above warranty will be that if
you discover any defects in the CDs within three months after receiving them, Scanvec Garment Systems will
replace the defective CDs with non-defective CDs.
4. No damages beyond Purchase Price. You agree that if, in connection with your use of the Licensed Materials,
you incur direct or indirect injury of any kind, including injury to persons or property or lost profits, Scanvec
Garment Systems shall be liable to you only for the Product Price. In no event will Scanvec Garment Systems,
its stockholders, directors, officers or employees be liable to you for any damages, including lost profits or other
incidental or consequential damages arising out of your use or inability to use the Licensed Materials.

Copyright 2001, Scanvec Garment Systems


ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures ______________________ 1
Welcome to OptiTex! ____________________________________________________ 1
How to Use This Book ___________________________________________________ 2
Package Contents _______________________________________________________ 3
Registration ____________________________________________________________ 3
Help Services Provided __________________________________________________ 3
Technical Support ______________________________________________________ 4
Installing OptiTex_______________________________________________________ 5
Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter _______________________________________ 9
Configuring Output Control Center (OCC) as output manger _________________ 12
Setting Up a Plotter ____________________________________________________ 15

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars_______________________________________ 17


The Tools _____________________________________________________________ 17
System Toolbar ________________________________________________________ 21
Marker Toolbar _______________________________________________________ 26
Piece Toolbar _________________________________________________________ 37

Alignment Toolbar _____________________________________________________ 45


Placement Toolbar: ____________________________________________________ 49
Group Toolbar:________________________________________________________ 58
General Toolbar _______________________________________________________ 63

Chapter 3: File Menu_______________________________________________ 71


New (Ctrl+N) _________________________________________________________71
Open Marker File (Ctrl + O)_____________________________________________71
Open Marker Dialog Box: _______________________________________________72
Merge Several Markers _________________________________________________73
History _______________________________________________________________74
Open Style File ________________________________________________________77
Import from SGS Modulate _____________________________________________82
File Finder____________________________________________________________84
Save (Ctrl + S)_________________________________________________________95
Save As ______________________________________________________________95
Save Current Nesting ___________________________________________________97
Export to CAD/CAM Files _____________________________________________100
Layers Table Dialog Box: ______________________________________________103
Dictionary Dialog Box:_________________________________________________104
Export to DXF and AAMA Setup: _______________________________________106
Import from CAD/CAM Files ___________________________________________108
Layers Table Dialog Box: ______________________________________________119
Dictionary Dialog Box:_________________________________________________121
Plot _________________________________________________________________123
Plot Options _________________________________________________________146
Plotter Setup _________________________________________________________148
Plotter Setup Dialog (OCC)_____________________________________________149

Print _______________________________________________________________ 150


Report to Excel and E-Mail utilities______________________________________ 153
Exit (Alt+F4)_________________________________________________________ 157

Chapter 4: Piece Menu_____________________________________________ 159


Info (Ctrl+I) _________________________________________________________ 159
All Sizes Info _________________________________________________________ 166
Global Info __________________________________________________________ 168
Delete _______________________________________________________________ 170
Flip Vertical _________________________________________________________ 171
Flip Horizontal _______________________________________________________ 172
Make Hole (Ctrl+H) ___________________________________________________ 173
Join Pieces ___________________________________________________________ 174
Edit Piece____________________________________________________________ 174
Piece Pattern Editor Dialog Box: ________________________________________ 175
Rotate_______________________________________________________________ 178
Internals (Ctrl+E)_____________________________________________________ 180
Internal Text _________________________________________________________ 184
Holes and Internal Contours ____________________________________________ 185
Global Change Internals Parameters _____________________________________ 189
Place Selected Pieces___________________________________________________ 191

Chapter 5: Marker Menu ___________________________________________ 197


Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M) ___________________________________________197
Marker List __________________________________________________________201
Clear Marker (Ctrl+C)_________________________________________________202
Remove (DEL or CTRL+R) _____________________________________________202
Piece Parameters ______________________________________________________203
Copy Marker _________________________________________________________208
Duplicate (Ctrl+D) ____________________________________________________208
Array _______________________________________________________________209
Alignment____________________________________________________________212
Replace Pieces on Marker ______________________________________________215
Substitute ____________________________________________________________217
Detect Intersections____________________________________________________221
Check Current Solution ________________________________________________221
Highlight Selected pieces _______________________________________________222
Optimize Marker Cut/Plot Order ________________________________________223
Shared lines __________________________________________________________224
Optimum Calculations _________________________________________________229
Weights______________________________________________________________232
Bump/Cut lines _______________________________________________________232
Fabric Pattern ________________________________________________________233
Load Fabric Dialog Box ________________________________________________235
Stripe Definition ______________________________________________________239

Relate Piece to Stripes (Shift+Home) _____________________________________ 243


Match ++ _________________________________________________________ 245
Undo (Ctrl+Z) ________________________________________________________ 247
Redo (Ctrl+Y) ________________________________________________________ 247

Chapter 6: Group Menu____________________________________________ 249


To Create a Group: ___________________________________________________ 249
Substitute size for selected pieces ________________________________________ 249
Keep ________________________________________________________________ 250
Ungroup_____________________________________________________________ 251
Fix on Marker ________________________________________________________ 251
Unfix Selected ________________________________________________________ 251
Unfix All ____________________________________________________________ 252
Stripe Adjust Group (Ctrl+G)___________________________________________ 252
Rectangular Block Fuse (Ctrl+B) ________________________________________ 253
Thrifty Block Fuse ____________________________________________________ 255
Optimum Block Fuse __________________________________________________ 255
Select Whole Bundle___________________________________________________ 255
Unify Pieces Orientation _______________________________________________ 256
Substitute One Bundle _________________________________________________ 256
Copy Size for Selected Pieces____________________________________________ 256

Chapter 7: View Menu _____________________________________________ 257


Pieces on Marker _____________________________________________________ 257
Display Pieces on Marker Dialog Box: ____________________________________ 257
Cut/Plot Order _______________________________________________________ 263
Stripes Lines _________________________________________________________ 263
Marker Full Length ___________________________________________________ 263
Zoom All Pieces on Marker _____________________________________________ 264
Piece Bar ____________________________________________________________ 264
Size Lists ____________________________________________________________ 264
Spread Marker _______________________________________________________ 266
Piece List ____________________________________________________________ 266
Zoom View Window ___________________________________________________ 267
Tool Bars ____________________________________________________________ 267
New Toolbar _________________________________________________________ 268
Customize ___________________________________________________________ 269
View the Status Bar ___________________________________________________ 270

Chapter 8: Options Menu __________________________________________ 271


Stripe Adjust _________________________________________________________271
Single Piece Gap ______________________________________________________271
Limit Rotation ________________________________________________________273
Round After Rotation __________________________________________________273
Colors _______________________________________________________________274
Fonts ________________________________________________________________276
Working Units ________________________________________________________278
Preferences___________________________________________________________279
Post Saving Action /Export to ASCII Application ___________________________286
AutoSave (Backup) file _________________________________________________287

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu___________________________________________ 289


Stop_________________________________________________________________289
Continue_____________________________________________________________289
Start AutoNesting _____________________________________________________290
Auto Nest Selected Pieces _______________________________________________291
Auto Nesting To Separate Block _________________________________________291
Renest Pieces on marker________________________________________________291
Compact Arrangement _________________________________________________291
Duplicate Marker _____________________________________________________292
Auto Nesting Setup ____________________________________________________292
Auto Save of Markers __________________________________________________294
Compact Arrangement (Ctrl J) __________________________________________296
Duplicate Marker _____________________________________________________296
Solutions Reports _____________________________________________________297
Start Batch___________________________________________________________300
Stop Batch ___________________________________________________________310
Continue Batch _______________________________________________________311
Batch Messages _______________________________________________________311
AutoNest Queue_______________________________________________________311
Queue Menu__________________________________________________________312

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation_______________________________ 315


Installing Algotex Plotters with SGS Software _____________________________ 315
Hewlett Packard 600 or 700 Ink Jet Plotter _______________________________ 318
Hewlett Packard 750C Ink Jet Plotter____________________________________ 325
Configuring the Hewlett Packard Draftmaster II Plotter ____________________ 334
Ioline 28 Plotter ______________________________________________________ 342
Ioline 600 Plotter _____________________________________________________ 352
Ioline Studio Plotter___________________________________________________ 362
Ioline Stylist Plotter ___________________________________________________ 371
Configuring the Ioline Summit Plotter For Use With SGS Software ___________ 379
Plotter Technology Plotter _____________________________________________ 393
Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter ___________________________________________ 400
Gerber AP300 and AP310 Plotters_______________________________________ 406
Gerber AP700 Plotter _________________________________________________ 411
NovaJet Plotter_______________________________________________________ 416
Numonics Design Partner 9000 Plotter ___________________________________ 424
Summagraphic HighPlot 7100/7200 Plotter _______________________________ 431
Lectra plotter ________________________________________________________ 438
Configuring the Cutting Edge Cutter ____________________________________ 443
Eastman Cutter ______________________________________________________ 447
Configuring the Gerber Cutter S3250 ____________________________________ 451
Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-91 _____________________________________ 453
Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-93 _____________________________________ 456

Chapter 11: Help Menu ____________________________________________ 459


Index (F1) ___________________________________________________________ 459
Keyboard ____________________________________________________________ 459
Using Help ___________________________________________________________ 460
Check Plug Protection _________________________________________________ 460
About OptiTex Mark __________________________________________________ 460
SGS On-Line _________________________________________________________ 460
Send File ____________________________________________________________ 461
How to Contact SGS___________________________________________________ 462

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands ____________________________________ 463


Pull Down Menu Shortcut Keys _________________________________________ 463
Other Shortcut keys ___________________________________________________ 465
Uses of the Right Mouse Button _________________________________________ 467
Rotating Pieces with the Mouse__________________________________________ 467
Rotating Pieces with the Rotate Tool _____________________________________ 467
Moving Pieces with the Bump, Bump/Rotate, and Jump/Rotate Tools__________ 467
Moving Overlapped Pieces _____________________________________________ 468
Fabric Spreading Methods _____________________________________________ 468
Defining Pieces as Foldable _____________________________________________ 468
Placing Folded Pieces __________________________________________________ 469
Unfolding Pieces ______________________________________________________ 469
Scroll Bars Automatic Utility ___________________________________________ 470
Creating a Group _____________________________________________________ 470
Shortcut Key Table: ___________________________________________________ 471

Glossary Terms ___________________________________________________ 477

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures


Welcome to OptiTex!
OptiTex is your complete software solution for computerized pattern design,
grading and marker making. It was created specifically for the manufacturer of
the apparel, transportation interiors, upholstery and sewn products industries.
OptiTexs powerful CAD tools enable you to draft pattern scratch or modify
existing pattern quickly and accurately. Simply import a pattern from your
favorite CAD/CAM program, create a new pattern using OptiTexs freehand
design tools or utilize OptiTexs unique digitizing capabilities.
With OptiTexs digitizing function, your pattern appears on your computer
screen as you digitize. If you make a mistake, simply erase it with the click of
a button. The OptiTex digitizing system is designed to work the way you want
to work. You can enter piece perimeters first, then enter notches, internals and
other piece information later. Its quick, easy and compatible with industry
standard digitizers.
Once your patters have been created and entered, OptiTex provides a
multitude of interactive editing tools. The most commonly used design and
editing tools are represented as icons in the OptiTex toolbar so you can access
commands with the click of a mouse; theres no need to navigate through a
series of pull down menus. Add or remove different types of notches, create
darts, add seam allowances pleats and buttons and view everything on screen
as you are working.
Add, move or delete points of a pattern, or move entire section of a pattern to
quickly lengthen or shorten pieces. And obtaining measurement has never
been easier. Whether youre measuring vertically, horizontally, diagonally or
between pattern pieces, OptiTexs measuring tool is as easy to use your own
tape measure.

Mark Manual

OptiTex Makes grading pattern pieces quick, simple and automatic is just as
interactive as the editing process. Grade any pattern, point by point or globally
according to previously stored rules. OptiTex enable you to witness the results
immediately on screen. With OptiTex , its easy to create your own rule
libraries, add new rules or remove old ones. You can even grade internals such
as notches, dart, pleats, buttons and lines.
When it comes to marker making, OptiTex provides both manual and
automatic nesting capabilities to help you design markers quickly and
efficiently. In addition, OptiTex gives you the flexibility to change order
quintets, substitute size, change marker dimensions and additional patterns to
your marker from other styles. Match your pattern piece to specific locations
on your striped, plaid or printed materials.
With the extensive training and knowledgeable technical support services we
offer, we are confident you will find OptiTex to be most users Friendly
production tool you have experienced.
Thank you choosing OptiTex.

How to Use This Book


This manual is design to mirror your computer interface. The chapters are
based on the pull down menus and tool icons. To find information in this book,
use the index, table file, which allows you to view, print or save pertinent
information.
The remainder of this chapter is dedicated to explaining the different training
and technical support services SGS offer. Lastly, we offer complete
installation directions with pictures.
Feel confident knowing that you not only purchased the most complete
software package for computerized pattern design, grading and marker
making, but also that SGS will continue to support you in every way we can.

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

Package Contents
Security Lock
** VERY IMPORTANT** OptiTex will not operate without the Security
Lock!
Scanvec Garment Systems (SGS) will replace your CD if it is lost, but WILL
NOT replace lost or stolen Security Lock. If the Security lock becomes
defective it will be replaced, but only after it has been returned to SGS. If you
must return the security lock, the package should be insured.
CD
The OptiTex Program Disk.
Documentation
OptiTex Manual and Lesson Plans

Registration
Before you begin, send in the Product Registration card to register yourself as
an owner of OptiTex. This card can be faxed or mailed to the address on the
card.
As a registered owner, youll be informed of updates, upgrades and training
seminars; youll be on the mailing list for technical bulletins and product
information.

Help Services Provided


SGS offers extensive customer service. Below are the operational support
services available to you as a Registered OptiTex user.

Mark Manual

Technical Support
Our US and Canada Technical Support department will provide assistance for
problems of a technical nature. If you are having problems printing or plotting,
for example, technical support will assist you.
When calling for technical support, please be at your computer with the
following information:

OptiTex Version Number.

OptiTex Security Lock # (listed on the lock).

Detailed description of the problem, including exact wording of


any error messages.

Technical Support offices


USA
Tel.: 610-521-5970
Fax: 610-521-1564
ISRAEL
Tel.: 972-3-904-9979
Fax: 972-3-904-2710

Toll free: (US & Canada) 877 RING OPTI

Internet
Messages can be sent via Internet to our support at the following address:
E-Mail Technical Support: support@optitex.com
E-Mail Sales & Marketing: sales@optitex.com
Web Page
http://www.optitex.com

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

Installing OptiTex
Before you run the installation program for OptiTex, make sure your computer
meets the minimum requirements to run the software.
OptiTex Requirements
Pentium or better processor
16 MB of RAM
Microsoft Windows 95
Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space
Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device
SVGA 15 monitor running at resolution 800X600, 256 colors,
1 parallel port, 1 serial port
Recommended Equipment
Pentium II 350 or better processor
64 MB of RAM
Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows 98 or Windows NT
Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space
Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device
AGP display card with 4 MB of memory

Mark Manual

17 monitor running at resolution 1024X768, 256 colors,


1 parallel port, 2 serial ports
USB port
SGS recommends using a Bus mouse if you intend to install a serial plotter or
digitizer, since most computers are only equipped with two serial outlets.
In order to use OptiTex, you need to do the following:

Attach the OptiTex Security.

Install the OptiTex Software.

Configure your Plotter.

Attach the OptiTex Security Lock


There are five steps, which must be performed in order to attach the OptiTex
Security Lock.

Turn your computer off.

Remove any cable or Security Lock which may be connected to


your printer (LPT1 the printer port is a female slot at the rear
panel of your computer).

Plug the male side of the OptiTex Security Lock into the printer
port (LPT1).

! Note: Before plugging in the Security Lock you may want to write down
the serial number located on the plug. This number will be necessary
when calling for Technical Support and is required on the Product
Registration Card.

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

Plug anything, which was previously attached to the printer into


the back end of the OptiTex Security Lock.

! Note: If you have a printer connected to the back of the OptiTex Security
Lock make sure the printer is properly grounded. If it is not grounded
correctly, the printer can short out your Security Lock. Do not connect
the Security Lock to an A/B switch box or a cable, as this also short out
the Security Lock (you may find that it will work for a while, but it will
eventually destroy the Security Lock). The OptiTex Security Lock
MUST be plugged DIRECTLY into the printer port (LPT1).

! Note: SGS does not guarantee that its copy protection and software are
compatible with all kind of computers.
Install the OptiTex Software
1.

Start Microsoft Windows 95.

2.

Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.

3.

The installation screen will display on the screen automatically.

4.

Select Install Optitex 8.0.

5.

In the first screen select the installation language. Click NEXT.

6.

Select the Optitex language.

! Note: The installation will take few minutes to copy the necessary files to
your hard drive.

The destination directory dialog box will be displayed. The


default installation path will be set to C:\Program files\Optitex8.
Click Browse button to select a different path. Click Next.

Mark Manual

Select the options that you would like to have install and click
next.

The program will begin installing the files to the selected drive and directories.
After the installation is complete, a dialog box will display thanking you for
installing the latest version of SGS software. Click OK and icons will be
placed on the desktop of your computer for OptiTex PDS and OptiTex Mark.
To open PDS or Mark, double click on the correct icon. You must restart you
computer after first OptiTex installation (no need to restart it if you upgrade
the existing OptiTex software).

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter


There are several steps to configuring your plotter. You must set up your
communication parameters, configure the plot manager, and use the plotter
setup command in the File menu.
You can use the plot manager of your choice. OptiTex supplies you with
OutMan (output manager) which supports different standard and non-standard
plotters as well as OCC. The OutMan uses Windows communication routines
and has its own Queue of file to plot.
Set Up Communication Parameters
You must first set up the communication parameters for the Com port to which
your plotter is connected (there is no need to configure parallel port). Refer to
your plotters manual to find its particular communication parameters.

! Note: It is absolutely necessary to setup the communication parameters for


the Com port to which your plotter is connected.
Configuring the OutMan as the Output manger
To configure OptiTex to your plotter, the OutMan must be loaded on the
station connected to the plotter. This way all users can share the plotter. Do not
load the Output manager on stations without a plotter connected.
The OutMan installation will copy all relevant files to your disk and place the
OutMan icon in your Startup group. OutMan displays a complete review of the
file being plotted, including the amount of paper left on the roll and other
useful information.
You must perform the following steps for each plotter you will be using.

Mark Manual

10

On the station connected to the plotter, double click the OutMan


icon. The OutMan dialog box will be displayed.

In the Out Man dialog box select the Communication command


in the Options menu. The Communication dialog box will then
be displayed.

Select the proper communication port and set the correct


communication parameters for it.

OutMan Dialog Box

Stop Action
Stop Action command is used to stop the current plot job.

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

Exit
Exit command is used to close the output manager.
Communication
Used to set up the port, baud rate, data bits, parity, stop bits, flow, and
protocol.
Working Units
Allows you to choose the working unit of your choice: mm, cm, inches, or
feet.
Font
Allows you to change the font size and type.
About
Displays information about the version of software.

11

Mark Manual

12

Configuring Output Control Center (OCC) as output manger


The Output Control Center (OCC) is used to communicate with your plotter or
cutter as well as manage all your plotting jobs.
The OCC supports plotters in local computer or on any other computer on
your network. OCC (Output Control Center) is a 32 Bit application,
native to windows, and it's main usage is for arranging a queue to plotters.
OCC can control all kind of output devices, regardless of how they are
connected to your computer. You can use serial, parallel & network plotting
with it at a great ease.
The following document comes to explain to you how to use this application.
Note that it's possible to set the OCC in the same way from our "Plot" dialog
in OptiTex 8.0
The OCC user interface
The Occ application is built mainly from two windows.
The first one is the "Plotters and Queue window" and the second one is the
"Jobs and Info. In queue"
The Toolbar is made of buttons which are always the same.
Make Job Ready
Making a plot job ready, and sending to plot
Hold Job
Leaves the job in the queue in order to plot it later.

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

Restart Job
Use this button to restart a stuck job or a job you want to re-print it.
You can also "restart" jobs that are already done and are in the done folder
of the selected plotter.
Delete Job
Removes the plot job from the queue.
Move Up
Move the job one level up in the queue.
Move Down
Move the job one level down in the queue.
Move to Top
Move the job to the top of the list.
Move to Bottom
Move the job to the bottom of the list.
Pause Job
Pausing the plot job, may be resume at any time.
Abort Job
Aborts the plotting job, but leaves it on the queue.

13

14

Mark Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

15

Setting Up a Plotter
7.

Open the OCC and choose "setup -> Plotters" from the file
menu.

The Plotter Setup dialog appears:


Press the "ADD" button, to add a new plotter
Choose the way the plotter is connected and press "Next"
If your plotter is connected directly to your computer, choose
"My computer"

And if it's a plotter that's connected to another computer on your


network, choose "Network computer".
Choose the way the plotter is set. Choose the port (LPT,COM or
File),

Choose if you want to print to Lectra, Gerber or Standad


plotting protocol, and choose the data bits, stop bits, parity and
baud rate as they are in your plotter's manual. In your plotter
manual you should also have the switches (communication
parameters) for your specific plotter.

After setting up everything press on the "Next" button.

In the plotter name dialog, write the name of your plotter (or any
name you want) and choose a path where you want to keep your
queue files (file to plot), and then press on Finish.

If you want other people on your network to be able to plot with


your plotter, you have check the "Shared Plotter" box.

16

Mark Manual

In the new window you can see your plotters, and the name of the computer
that they are connected to. On the lower part of this window, you can see
which plotter is the Default one, If you want to change the default plotter, all
you have to do is to click once on the plotter you want to make as default and
then press on the "set Default" button.
When you're satisfied with your plotter settings press the "Close" button, to get
into the main window of the OCC application again.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

17

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars


The Tools
Tools are small icons or pictures that represent different features within the
software. Tools are displayed across the top of the screen in bars (rows)
located below the pull down menus and above the piece bar. There are seven
different Toolbars in the MARK software:
The System Toolbar:

The Marker Toolbar:

The Piece Toolbar:

The Alignment Toolbar:

Mark Manual

18
The Placement Toolbar:

The Group Toolbar:

The General Toolbar:

Toolbars may be viewed on the screen, or they may be hidden from view.
When all Toolbars are displayed, the size of the working area is reduced. To
control the display of Toolbars on the screen, use the Toolbars command in the
Display menu. To display a particular Toolbar on the screen, place a check
mark next to the name of the Toolbar. To hide a particular Toolbar, uncheck
the name of the Toolbar. To check or uncheck a selection, click on the name
of the Toolbar in the Toolbar Menu. Toolbars toggle from on to off each time
the mouse clicks on the name of the Toolbar.
To Customize a Toolbar:
1.

From the View menu, select Tool Bars.

1.

Click on Customize.

2.

Click on New. Name the new toolbar.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

19

3.

Click OK. The toolbar will display under the Toolbars tab and on
the working screen.

4.

Select the Tools tab. On the right, the buttons are displayed for
the highlighted toolbar on the left.

5.

Select the button to be placed in the new toolbar. A description of


that button will display at the bottom of the dialog box.

6.

Click and drag the button from the dialog box to the new toolbar
on the working screen.

7.

Lift the mouse button to drop the button into the toolbar. Repeat
this until all desired buttons are placed in the toolbar.

8.

Click OK.

To Reset a Toolbar:
Resetting a toolbar replaces any buttons that were taken out of a default
toolbar.
2.

From the View menu, select Tool Bars.

3.

Highlight the desired toolbar.

4.

Click Reset.

5.

Click Close.

Engaging a Tool
Clicking once on the tool activates most tools. The cursor changes from the
normal pointer (an arrow) to another type of pointer that coincides with the
selected tool. For example, when the Rotate tool is activated, the normal

Mark Manual

20

pointer turns into a curved arrow. The curved arrow reminds the user that the
rotate feature is currently activated.
Disengaging a Tool
Returning to the normal arrow pointer disengages a tool. To return to the
normal arrow pointer, either click on the tool that looks like an arrow, or click
the right mouse button, and select the first option in the pop up menu, Select
Tool using the left mouse button.
Selecting another tool from one of the Toolbars also disengages tools currently
in use.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

21

System Toolbar

Release Tool
The Release tool (sometimes called the Select or the Arrow tool) is the default
tool used in the Mark software. This tool is used to select pieces, points, and
line segments.
!

Note: To access the Release tool without clicking on the Release icon,
click the right mouse button one time. With the left button, select the
Select tool from the pop-up menu.

New
Use the new tool to start a new marker (DSP) file. A DSP file contains all the
pieces necessary to make one complete marker layout. When the New tool is
selected, the Marker Definition dialog box displays by default. Enter specific
marker area information for the new marker and click Ok. Pattern files are
loaded by using Open Style Files in the File Menu.
! Note: Refer to the File Chapter for more information.

Mark Manual

22

Open
The Open tool opens an existing SGS Marker file
! Note: SGS marker files have the extension, .DSP.
! Note: The last directory where marker files have been saved becomes the
default directory for the Open and Save commands. Use the Browse
button to select a different directory.

Save
The Save tool saves the file displayed on screen to the current path under the
current name, replacing the old file. If a new file has been created, but the new
file has not been previously saved, a dialog box prompts for a file name to be
entered.
! Note: The DSP extension is added to the file name automatically.
! Note: The last directory where marker files have been saved becomes the
default directory for the Open and Save commands. Use the Browse
button to select a different directory.
! Note: Refer to the File Chapter for more information.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

23

Print
Use the Print Tool to activate the Print dialog box. Refer to the File Chapter
for in depth information.

Plot
Use the Plot Tool to activate the Plot dialog box. Refer to the File Chapter for
in depth information.

About
Choose the About OptiTex Mark tool to find the version of OptiTex Mark that
is currently being used. This information is necessary when contacting
Technical Support for help with the SGS software.

Help Tool
Use the Help tool to get information about any item or feature in the SGS
software. Select the Help tool and then click on any item on the screen to get
information about the selected item. Information regarding the selected item
displays on the screen.

24

Mark Manual

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

25

Stop Auto Nest


When the automatic process begins, a clock icon will be displayed indicating
that automatic placement is in process. To stop the Auto-nesting procedure,
click the Stop icon. The Nesting process will be halted and only those pieces
already nested will stay on the marker.
The Auto-nesting procedure stops only after the current piece is placed on the
marker. In cases where the current piece is complicated, or the solution task is
very large, it may take some time to stop the Auto-nesting procedure. Once the
Auto-nesting procedure has been halted the user may change the Piece
Attributes, move the nested pieces and place new pieces. The new attributes
will be taken into account when the Auto-nesting procedure is resumed.
Select Continue from the Nesting menu to resume the nesting in progress.

Redraw Marker
Pressing the Redraw Icon refreshes the marker area.

Mark Manual

26

Marker Toolbar

View All Pieces


A single-click on the View All Pieces icon will reset the screen to Full scale.

Zoom
Select the Zoom In tool to enlarge a specific area. The Zoom limitations are
set by the current application and by Windows.
To Zoom:
9.

Click the Zoom tool.

10.

Click and drag a rectangle around the area to Zoom upon

Unzoom
A single-click on the Unzoom icon will reset the screen to the previous scale.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

27

View All Marker


A single click on the View All Marker icon displays the total marker area
scaled to fit on the screen.

Undo
Use the Undo tool to reverse the most recent action performed in the marker
file. The Undo tool may be selected up to 20 times undoing the 20 most recent
operations, back to adding a piece to the marker area. Undo does not work to
undo the loading of the file.

Redo
Use the Redo tool to inverse the most recent action. This command cancels the
last 20 operations, one at a time.

Measure
Select the Measure tool to measure distances between any two points. The
points can be vertical, horizontal or diagonal.

Mark Manual

28

To Measure
6.

Click the Measure tool.

7.

Click at the location you would like to begin the measurement


and drag to the location you want to end the measurement.

8.

The DX distance, DY distance, and the actual distance will be


displayed along the bottom of the screen.

Notch
This tool adds, deletes, or edits a notch or button on pattern pieces.
To Add a Notch:
9.

Click the Notch tool.

10.

Click at the location on the piece to add the notch. The Edit Notch
dialog box is displayed.

11.

Select the desired Notch Attributes.

12.

Click OK.

To Delete a Notch:
11.

Click the Notch tool.

13.

Click the notch to delete. The Edit Notch dialog box is displayed.

14.

Click Delete.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

To Edit a Notch:
12.

Click the Notch tool.

13.

Click the notch to edit. The Edit Notch dialog box is displayed.

14.

Select the desired notch attributes.

15.

Click OK.

Edit Notch Dialog Box:

29

Mark Manual

30

Notch Type
There are six types of notches. Define the type of notch to cut on the piece.
The T and I notch will both be cut as a slit notch on a numerically controlled
(NC) cutter.
Mode
When using a numerically controlled (NC) cutter, the user can define whether
the notch to be drawn, cut, or punched. Call the Fax Back System to learn
how to set the options for the various NC Cutters.
The result of each attribute is different depending on the type of output
machine. Some machines can produce a single notch with different tools: Pen,
Knife or a Special Punch tool. On different machines the knives could be
different: Circular, Tangential or Jig knives. Each machine has its own
advantages and limitations.
Relative Angle
This option allows you to change the angle of the notch. For example, if you
would like the V notch to point out instead of in, apply a 180 degree angle to
the V notch.
Depth
This option allows you to change the depth of the notch.
Width
This option allows you to change the width of the notch. Usually the width
twice the depth.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

31

Stripe Adjust Number and method


This option is used to match a piece on the notch to a stripe or plaid line. For
more information, see the Stripes and Relate Piece to Stripes commands in the
Marker Menu.
Operation Stop
If you have a numerically controlled (NC) cutter, this option sets the cutter to
stop cutting the notch Before with confirmation, after with confirmation,
before (without a confirmation), After (without a confirmation), or Not Stop
(no stop at all).
To Add a Button:
16.

Click the Notch tool.

17.

Click at the location you would like to add the button. The Edit
Button dialog box is displayed.

18.

Select the desired Button Attributes.

19.

Click OK.

To Delete a Button:
20.

Click the Notch tool.

21.

Click the button you would like to delete. The Edit Button dialog
box is displayed.

22.

Click Delete.

Mark Manual

32

To Edit a Button:
23.

Click the Notch tool.

24.

Click the button you would like to edit. The Edit Button dialog
box is displayed.

25.

Select the desired button attributes.

26.

Click OK.

Edit Button Dialog Box:

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

33

Mode
If you have a numerically controlled (NC) cutter, you can define whether you
would like the button to be drawn, cut, or drilled. Call the Fax Back System to
learn how to set the options for the various NC Cutters.
The result of each attribute is different depending on the type of output
machine. Some machines can produce a single button with different tools: Pen,
Knife or a Special Drill tool. On different machines you might find different
knives: Circular, Tangential or Jig knives. Each one its their own advantages
and limitations.
Radius
This area is used to define the size of the button to be cut.
Stripe Adjust Number
This option is used to match a piece on the notch to a stripe or plaid line. For
more information, see the Stripes and Relate Piece to Stripes commands in the
Marker Menu.

Text
The Text tool changes the location, size, and angle of the Piece Description
information. The Piece Description information is determined by the Display
Pieces on Marker option in the Options menu. The Text also allows you to add
or edit internal text on a piece. The internal text and piece description
information in the Internal Text Dialog box is displayed to scale.

Mark Manual

34

To Edit Piece Description Information:


27.

Click the Text tool.

28.

Click the cursor on the piece to edit. The Internal Text dialog box
is displayed.

29.

Check Piece Description field. The Piece Description is displayed


in the Text field.

! Note: If you would like the changes to occur on the selected size only,
disable the All Sizes field.
15.

Make the changes.

16.

Click OK.

To Add Internal Text to a Piece:


30.

Click the Text tool.

31.

Click the cursor on the piece to edit. The Internal Text dialog box
is displayed.

32.

Type the text that you would like to add in the Text box.

! Note: If you would like the changes to occur on the selected size only,
disable the All Sizes field.
17.

Make the desired changes.

18.

Click OK.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

35

To Edit Internal Text On a Piece:


33.

Click the Text tool.

34.

Click the cursor toward the front of the text that you would like to
change. The Internal Text dialog box is displayed with the text in
the Text box.

! Note: If you would like the changes to occur on the selected size only,
disable the All Sizes field.
19.

Make the desired changes.

20.

Click OK

Internal Text Dialog Box:

Text Editor
This box displays the text to edit.

Mark Manual

36
Text Parameters

The Size of font and base angle of the selected text can be changed.
The default text size for the size name and description is a minimum of 1 cm
and 1 mm respectively. The Piece Description text can be changed using the
Global Info command in the Piece menu.
Apply to All Sizes
When this option is enabled, the text will be changed or added on all sizes.
When it is disabled, the text will be changed or added only to the selected size.

Show Cut/Plot Order


The Cut/Plot Ordering displays the order in which the pattern pieces will be
cut or plotted. Double click the right mouse button on a blank area of the
marker to check and uncheck this option. The Cut/Plot Order can be changed
using the Optimize Cutting Order and Selected Piece Cutting Order commands
in the Marker menu.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

37

Left Adjust
Left Adjust places pieces in blank areas of the marker instead of using the
manual dragging and dropping technique. Left Adjust enables the shoot
operation usually done with the right mouse button to be done using the LEFT
mouse button. This option takes into consideration all of the previously
specified options like rotating, mirroring and so on. The size, position and
number of angles a piece has contribute to the amount of time it takes to
Adjust the piece on screen.

Piece Toolbar

Adjust Left (Alt+4)


The Adjust Left arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the left
direction until the piece(s) hits another contour.
! Note: The Alt+4 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad.
! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selected
direction 10 pixels at a time.

Mark Manual

38
Adjust Right (Alt+6)

The Adjust Right arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the right
direction until the piece(s) hits another contour.
! Note: The Alt+6 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad.
! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selected
direction 10 pixels at a time.

Adjust Down (Alt+2)


The Adjust Down arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the down
direction until the piece(s) hits another contour.
! Note: The Alt+2 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad.
! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selected
direction 10 pixels at a time.

Adjust Up (Alt+8)
The Adjust Up arrow places and moves the selected piece(s) in the up
direction until the piece(s) hits another contour.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

39

! Note: The Alt+8 shortcut only works with the numeric keypad.
! Note: The arrows on the keyboard will move the piece in the selected
direction 10 pixels at a time.

Flip Y
The Flip Y tool allows the pattern piece to flip in the Y direction on the marker
area. This tool will not flip the piece if a one-way direction has been assigned
or flipping has not been permitted in the Piece Info. Box under the Piece
Menu.

Flip X
The Flip X tool allows the pattern piece to flip in the X direction on the marker
area.

Rotate by 90 Degrees
The Rotate by 90 Degrees rotates the selected piece(s) counter-clockwise each
time it is selected. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options menu) is
enabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate 90 degrees for the
rotation to take place.

Mark Manual

40

Rotate By 180 Degrees


The Rotate by 180 Degrees rotates the selected piece(s) counter-clockwise
each time it is selected. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options menu)
is enabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate 180 degrees for
the rotation to take place.

Rotate by Center
The Rotate from Center tool allows a selected piece(s) to be rotated from a
center point with the mouse. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options
menu) is enabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate for the
rotation to take place. If the Round after Rotation option in the Options menu
is enabled, the piece will snap to the closest 90-degree angle (within 8
degrees).
To Rotate from the Center of the Selected Piece:
35.

Click the Rotate from Center tool.

36.

Click the mouse on the desired piece and move the mouse in a
circle. The piece will rotate on a pivot point that is located in the
center of the selected piece.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

41

Rotate Piece
The Rotate from Specific Point tool allows a selected piece(s) to be rotated
with the mouse. If the Limit Rotation command (in the Options menu) is
enabled, the direction limits must allow the piece to rotate for the rotation to
take place. If the Round after Rotation option in the Options menu is enabled,
the piece will snap to the closest 90-degree angle (within 8 degrees).
To Rotate from a Specific Point On the Selected Piece(s):
37.

Click the Rotate from Specific Point tool.

38.

Click the mouse on the desired pivot point on the piece, moves
the mouse in a circle. The piece will rotate from the exact point
selected.

Adjust
Adjust places pieces in blank areas of the marker instead of using the manual
dragging and dropping technique. This option takes into consideration all of
the previously specified options like rotating, mirroring and so on. The size,
position and number of angles a piece has contribute to the amount of time it
takes to Adjust the piece on screen.
To Adjust To the Nearest Piece Or Boundary:
39.

Click the Adjust tool. (The Adjust tool remains enabled until
Adjust Rotate or Insert to Hole tool is selected.)

Mark Manual

42
40.

Click the right mouse button on the piece(s) to Adjust.

! Tip: To select multiple pieces, click and drag a box around the desired
pieces, or click on the first piece and press and hold the Shift key to
add additional pieces to the group.
21.

Drag the cursor to the area you would like the piece to be placed.

The piece will move to the desired location and bump against the first piece
or marker boundary it comes to.

Adjust Rotate
The Adjust Rotate tool is similar to the Adjust tool. It Adjust Rotate the piece
to get a tighter marker. If the Limit Rotation command in the Options menu is
enabled, the Rotation Limits must also be defined in the Piece Info Dialog
box. The size, position and number of angles a piece has contribute to the
amount of time it takes to Adjust the piece on screen.
To Adjust Rotate to the Nearest Piece or boundary:
41.

Click the Adjust Rotate tool.

42.

Click and drag the right mouse button on the selected piece(s) you
wish to Adjust Rotate.

43.

Drag the cursor to the area you would like the piece to be placed.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

43

Insert to Hole
The Insert to Hole tool is similar to the Adjust Rotate tool. It Jumps over
placed pieces and Rotates the piece to get a tighter marker. If the Limit
Rotation command in the Options menu is enabled, the Rotation Limits must
also be defined in the Piece Info Dialog box. The size, position and number of
angles a piece has contribute to the amount of time it takes to Jump the piece
on screen.

Mark Manual

44
To Insert to Hole:
44.

Click the Insert to Hole tool.

45.

Click and drag the right mouse button on the selected piece(s) you
wish to Insert to Hole.

46.

Drag the cursor to the area you would like the piece to be placed.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

45

Alignment Toolbar

The Alignment Tools enable several pieces to align as a group on the marker.

Align Center
The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the marker area.

Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to


align while holding the Ctrl key.

Click the Align Center icon.

! Note: Pieces that are beside each other on the marker will overlap when
aligned.

Align Left
The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece
closest to the markers left boundary.

Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to


align while holding the Ctrl key.

Click the Align Left icon.

Mark Manual

46

! Note: Pieces that are beside each other on the marker will overlap when
aligned.

Align Right
The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece
closest to the markers right boundary.

Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to


align while holding the Ctrl key.

Click the Align Right icon

! Note: Pieces that are beside each other on the marker will overlap when
aligned.

Align to Top
The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece
closest to the top of the marker area.

Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to


align while holding the Ctrl key.

Click the Align Left icon.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

47

Align to Bottom
The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece
closest to the bottom of the marker area.

Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to


align while holding the Ctrl key.

Click the Align Left icon.

Align Horizontally
The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece
closest to the Left boundary of the marker area.

Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to


align while holding the Ctrl key.

Click the Align Left icon.

Align Vertically
The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece
closest to the Left boundary of the marker area.

Mark Manual

48

Drag a box around the pieces to align. Or click on the pieces to


align while holding the Ctrl key.

Click the Align Left icon.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

49

Placement Toolbar:

Place (CTRL+P)
Use this command to place the selected piece or pieces on the marker area.

Hold down the Shift key, select the pieces you wish to place.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place or select CTRL+P

! Note: There is a difference between placing the pieces with CTRL+P


command and placing the pieces with the Double Click command.

Place One Bundle


Use this command to place one set or bundle of the selected piece or pieces
onto the marker area.

Hold down the Shift key, select the pieces you wish to place.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place One Set or select


CTRL+SHIFT+P

Mark Manual

50

Place All
Use this command to place all of the selected pieces onto the selected area.

Hold down the Shift key, select the pieces you wish to place.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place All or select


CTRL+SHIFT+ALT+P

Place Folded Left


This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the left
edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left can only be used on Faced or
Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the right/left.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold along
the left boundary of the marker.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Left from the Marker


menu. The piece will be placed along the left boundary.

OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step


number two, place your cursor in the desired location on the left
edge of the marker boundary, hold down the L key and double
click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed along the left
boundary of the marker.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

51

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the
pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply
return the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Faced or Folded refer to the MARKER


DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with
folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in
the Piece menu.

Place Folded Right


This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the right
edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right can only be used on Faced or
Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the right/left.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold along
the right boundary of the marker.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Right from the Marker


menu. The piece will be placed along the right boundary.

OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step


number two, place your cursor in the desired location on the right
edge of the marker boundary, hold down the R key and double
click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed along the
right boundary of the marker.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the
pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply
return the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

Mark Manual

52

! Tip: To define a marker as Faced or Folded refer to the MARKER


DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with
folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in
the Piece menu.

Place Folded Up
This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the upper
edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Up can only be used on Tubular or
Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold along
the upper boundary of the marker.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Up from the Marker


menu. The piece will be placed along the upper boundary.

OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step


number two, place your cursor in the desired location on the
upper edge of the marker boundary, hold down the U key and
double click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed along
the upper boundary of the marker.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the
pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simpily
return the piece to the Piece Display Bar.
! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER
DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with
folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in
the Piece menu.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

53

Place Folded Down


This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the lower
edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Down can only be used on Tubular
or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold along
the lower boundary of the marker.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Folded Down from the Marker


menu. The piece will be placed along the lower boundary.

OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step


number two, place your cursor in the desired location on the
lower edge of the marker boundary, hold down the D key and
double click the left mouse button. The piece will be placed along
the lower boundary of the marker.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the
pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply
return the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER


DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with
folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in
the Piece menu.

Mark Manual

54

Place Left Up
This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the upper left
corner of the marker boundary. Place Left Up can only be used on Folded
markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down and
left/right.
In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into quarters and
place in the upper left corner of the marker boundary.
Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Left Up from the Marker menu. The piece
will be placed in the upper left corner of the marker boundary.
OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two,
place your cursor in the upper left corner of the marker boundary, hold down
the Home key (located on the numeric keypad) and double click the left mouse
button. The piece will be placed in the upper left corner of the marker
boundary.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the
pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply
return the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER


DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with
folding allowed refer to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in
the Piece menu.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

55

Place Left Down


This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the lower left
corner of the marker boundary. Place Left Down can only be used on Folded
markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down and
left/right.
In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into quarters and
place in the lower left corner of the marker boundary.
Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Left Up from the Marker menu. The piece
will be placed in the lower left corner of the marker boundary.
OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two,
place your cursor in the lower left corner of the marker boundary, hold down
the End key (located on the numeric keypad) and double click the left mouse
button. The piece will be placed in the lower left corner of the marker
boundary.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the
pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply
return the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER


DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with
folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in
the Piece menu.

Mark Manual

56

Place Right Up
This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the upper right
corner of the marker boundary. Place Right Up can only be used on Folded
markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down and
left/right.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into
quarters and place in the upper right corner of the marker
boundary.

Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Right Up from the Marker


menu. The piece will be placed in the upper right corner of the
marker boundary.

OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step


number two, place your cursor in the upper right corner of the
marker boundary, hold down the Page UP key (located on the
numeric keypad) and double click the left mouse button. The
piece will be placed in the upper right corner of the marker
boundary.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the
pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply
return the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER


DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with
folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in
the Piece menu.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

57

Place Right Down


This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it in the lower right
corner of the marker boundary. Place Right Down can only be used on Folded
markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed in the up/down and
left/right.
In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece you wish to fold into quarters and
place in the lower right corner of the marker boundary.
Select Place Selected Pieces/Place Right Down from the Marker menu. The
piece will be placed in the lower right corner of the marker boundary.
OPTONAL: Rather than follow the instructions defined in step number two,
place your cursor in the lower right corner of the marker boundary, hold down
the Page Down key (located on the numeric keypad) and double click the left
mouse button. The piece will be placed in the lower right corner of the marker
boundary.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the
pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply
return the piece to the Piece Display Bar.

! Tip: To define a marker as Tubular or Folded refer to the MARKER


DEFINITIONS command in the Marker menu. To define a piece with
folding allowed refers to the INFO or ALL SIZES INFO commands in
the Piece menu.

Mark Manual

58

Group Toolbar:

Keep
This command will group selected pieces together and allow for placement of
additional pieces exactly the same as the kept group. This option is helpful
when nesting pieces according to sets.
To Keep a Group

Create a group.

From the GROUPING menu choose KEEP.

The grouped pieces will be displayed with a dashed line around them, and the
pieces will also be displayed in their own group on the Piece Display Bar. This
group can be placed and manipulated on the marker as if it were a single piece.

! Tip: After placing a kept group, the pieces will move as a group until a
different piece is selected or another group is placed.

Ungroup
Choose the Ungroup command to release kept pieces. Once the Ungroup
command is selected, the group will no longer be displayed in the Piece

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

59

Display Bar. The individual pieces will remain in their original Piece Display
Boxes.

Fix on Marker
Select the Fix On Marker command to permanently group pieces. The pieces
will appear to be frozen in the selected group until they are released with
one of the Unfix commands. Anytime any part of the fixed group is selected,
the whole group will be highlighted and will move as a single object.
To Fix a Group on the Marker

Create a group.

From the GROUPING menu choose FIX ON MARKER

Unfix Selected
All pieces that were in the selected group will be released and can be placed
individually.
To Unfix a Selected Group on the Marker:
Select the group, groups you want to release.
From the GROUPING menu choose UNFIX SELECTED

Mark Manual

60
Unfix All

Select the Unfix All command to release the entire fixed group of pieces. All
fixed groups will be released and the pieces will move individually.

Stripe Adjust Group


This command is used to ensure that if piece is re-positioned within the floral,
stripe, or plaid marker area, the piece will match to the other placed pieces.
To Create a Stripe Adjust Group:

Position the pieces that relate to one another on the marker area.

Select the group of pieces.

From the GROUPING menu choose Stripe Adjust Group. If any


of the Stripe Adjust Group pieces are moved, the moved piece
will always snap to a similar location

Rectangular Block Fuse


This tool is used to create separate Fusing (Cutting) zones. It enables to
eliminate certain zones on the marker from being cut.
To Create Rectangular Block Fuse

Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a block
fuse from.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

61

Choose from Grouping menu Block Fuse option.

Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in the
block.

! Note: Block fuse will be disabled to a folded piece.


A All nested pieces will plot all the pieces with the drawn blocks.
A Marker without blocks will plot the marker without the blocks.
A Marker with block spaces will plot the marker with block spaces.
Contain all blocks will plot only the contents of the blocks.

Thrifty Block Fuse


This feature enables the user to create a "thrifty" block fusing as opposed to a
rectangle block fusing; this limits fabric waste and the user can still create a
block fusing on selected pieces.
To Create Thrifty Block Fuse:

Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a thrifty
block fuse from.

Choose from Grouping menu Thrifty Fuse option. Only


pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in
the block.

Mark Manual

62

! Note: Thrifty fuse will be disabled to a folded piece.

Select Whole Bundle


This command enables the user to select a complete bundle by selecting any
piece within the bundle

Unify Pieces Orientation


This command enables the user to unify piece orientations within bundle
according to one selected piece orientation within the bundle.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

63

General Toolbar

Piece Info (Ctrl+I)


This command is used to verify, update and change all text and parameters of
the selected piece and size. The Piece Information includes the style and piece
name, code, description, number of copies and current plies, remainders,
buffering information, area and perimeter measurements, priority in auto
nesting, orientation of the piece, rotation limits, locked piece and flipping
information.

All Sizes Info


This option enables you to simultaneously set attributes for all sizes of a
selected piece.
To Set All Sizes Info:

From the PIECE menu choose ALL SIZES INFO. The All Sizes
Information dialog box will be displayed.

Enter the desired values.

Click Apply next to each changed value.

Mark Manual

64

Global Info
The Global Info controls information settings for all sizes or specific sizes on
all pieces or specific pieces in the marker.

! Tip: The Global Info command enables you to manipulate piece(s) attributes
in the size level. You may also see the net weight and the net area of a
piece, and calculate gross values per size using the Optimum Area
option in the Marker menu.
To Set Global Info for all Sizes on All Pieces:

From the PIECE menu choose GLOBAL INFO.... The Global


Pieces Info dialog box will be displayed.

Change the value(s) of the chosen attribute(s).

Click Apply to each changed value.

To Specify Settings For the Selected Size on Selected Pieces

Hold down the Shift key and select the pieces of your choice in
the Piece Display Bar.

In the Global Info dialog box, enable the Settings For Selected
Pieces Only and the Settings for Selected Sizes Only options.

Select the size for which you want to assign a setting.

Enter the specifications for that size. Be sure to select SET after
changing each specification/option.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

65

Continue selecting the sizes you want to change, or click CLOSE


to exit the Global Information dialog box.

Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M)


Use this command to specify or change options related to the current marker,
including the marker size, selvages and the fabric spreading method.
To Apply Marker Definitions:

From the MARKER menu choose MARKER DEFINITIONS.


The Marker Definitions dialog box will be displayed.

Select the desired options.

Enter the desired information.

Click OK.

Display Pieces on Marker


Select the Display Pieces on Marker command to determine the specific
information that will be displayed on screen and output with the file. Since
most of the output options will perform the output according to the
information displayed on screen (WYSIWYG, What You See Is What You
Get), it is important to control all of the different elements.

Mark Manual

66

To Display Pieces on Marker:

From the OPTIONS menu choose DISPLAY PIECES ON


MARKER.... The Display Pieces on Marker dialog box will be
displayed.

Select the desired options.

Click OK.

The selected information will be displayed on screen and output with the file

! Note: If there is an x in the box to the left of the option, it is selected and will
be displayed on screen and will output with the file. Click once to
place an x or select the option, click again to remove it.

Placement on Marker

The Placement on marker gives you the location of your selected piece by
coordinates:
In the x description there are: left, center and right, you can move your piece
Horizontally by entering a new coordinate value to one of the three windows.
In the y description there are: top, center and bottom, you can move your piece

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

67

Vertically by entering a new coordinate value to one of the three windows.

Stripe Definition
This command is used to define stripes, plaids, or floral prints on the marker,
simulating a repeated design. The Stripe Definition option is used when you
are marking material with a special design that must appear on the piece in a
specific place. It ensures that your piece will be cut correctly with the repeated
design.

! Note: The auto-nesting procedure does not take the Stripe Definition option
into account.
To Define Stripes:

From the MARKER menu choose STRIPE DEFINITION... The


Stripes Definitions dialog box will be displayed.

Verify or change the selected parameters.

Click OK.

! Note: Select the Hide Stripes option in the Options menu to display only a
fraction of the horizontal and vertical lines around the border of the
marker. For some this is more visually appealing and easier to work
with.
To Add or Edit Stripe Adjust Notches or Buttons:
Decide which pieces in your DSN file match.
Mark the match point on the pieces with notches or buttons.

68

Mark Manual

The Notches and Buttons must be assigned Stripe Adjust numbers. To ensure
that all future markers receive the same stripes adjust numbers, it is best to
make the notch and button edits in OptiGrade. If the attributes were not
specified with OptiGrade, you can use the Notch icon to edit the stripe adjust
number in OptiMark.
Numbers 1 through 4 can be used for stripe adjust numbers. The match points
that line up must be assigned the same stripe adjust number and notch or
button type. For example, if the side seams of the front and back should line
up, add the same type of notch on both pieces in the matching location, and
assign a stripe adjust number of one. If the front has a patch pocket that lines
up on the right side, add a button to the front and to the pocket, and assign a
stripe adjust number of one or two.
When the first piece is placed in the marker, the second piece will look at the
first piece to determine where it needs to be located. All pieces placed on the
marker that have the same notch number will be placed at the same
coordinates of each repeated stripe as the first piece.
When stripe adjust according to sets is disabled, the next bundle placed will
match in the same way that the previous bundle of the same size matched.
When stripe adjust according to sets in enabled, the next bundle placed will
match any way that the user requests. If stripe adjust according to sets in
enabled and the first bundle placed was related to Stripes, the next bundle
placed will match in the same way that the previous bundle of the same size
matched.
You cannot have several like notches with the same stripe numbers on the
same piece. You can have different notches (V, Us etc.) with the same stripe
numbers on the same piece.

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

69

Note: Matching points can also be defined using the Fabric and Stripes
command in OptiGrade.
Note: If you would like the stripe adjust point (notch or button) to match to a
particular stripe junction, follow the To Relate Pieces (With Stripe
Adjust Notches Or Buttons) To A Stripe instructions later in this
chapter.

Detect Intersections
When this option is disabled, the marker will be plotted exactly as it appears
on the screen. When this option is enabled, OptiMark will check the marker
for overlapping pieces. A message will be displayed if any are found.

AutoNesting Setup
The Auto Nest Setup enables you to select one way of nesting option from
several options. It is also possible to create a list of markers to nest and test the
results with different material width. A comparison table will be created for
verification purposes.
The Standard is a more simple but yet sophisticated way of nesting with two
options: Quick (when the Quick is marked) and slower one. The slower way
will bring better results but will take longer time.
Nest++ is an optional add-on application to OptiTex Mark with fantastic
results. The efficiency is based on the duration that the automatic algorithm
will run. The average time needed to get a good nest should last about 15

70

Mark Manual

minutes for a marker with 50 to 80 pieces. A good nesting can be reached also
after 2 or 3 minutes.

Chapter 3: File Menu

71

Chapter 3: File Menu


The File menu includes commands that enable you to Open, Save, Print, Plot,
Import and Export files. From the File menu you will control most of your
input and output options.
To select one of the File commands, choose the command from the file menu,
press the Shortcut Key (listed in parentheses), or click the icon.

New (Ctrl+N)
This command resets the screen and clears all current pieces and marker data
from memory. It is used to create a new marker file.
To Create a New File:
From the File Menu select New or press Ctrl+N.
If there is a file currently open, a dialog box will be displayed asking you to
save the current file or cancel the command. An empty OptiTex Mark screen
and the Marker Definitions dialog box will be displayed. See the Marker
menu for more information on the Marker Definitions dialog box.

Open Marker File (Ctrl + O)


Select Open Marker File from the File Menu to open an existing Marker file.
A Marker file has a DSP extension, which stands for Display File. A Marker
file is usually based on Style (DSN) files, which comes from OptiTex PDS or
grading application. Another sources for markers are those that are imported
from other CAD/CAM applications. The Marker File can consist of one or
more DSN or imported files and can contain both placed and unplaced pieces.

Mark Manuel

72

When opening a Marker file, you can enable a verification option from the
Preference command list, which is called: Check style file before opening.
This option verifies that the original source design (DSN) file used to create
the current Marker file didnt change in the meantime, and that it still exists in
the same place. If something did change, there will be an error message.
OptiTex Mark remembers the last directory where you have saved your DSN
or DSP files, and it will become the default drive for opening and saving all
other files.

Open Marker Dialog Box:

Open a Marker File from the Current Directory:

From the File Menu select Open Marker File or press CTRL + O.
The Open Marker File dialog box is displayed.

Select the desired DSP file from the File Name list box.

Press Enter or click OPEN.

Chapter 3: File Menu

73

! Tip: If you double click (press left mouse button twice quickly) on a file
name, OptiTex Mark will select the file and open it.
Open a Marker File From Another Directory:

From the File Menu select Open Marker File or press CTRL + O.
The Open Marker File dialog box is displayed.

From the Look In list, double click the first option (usually C:\). A
list of directories is displayed.

Double click the desired directory. A list of DSP files will be


displayed in the File Name List Box (if any exist).

Select the desired file from the File Name List box.

Click OK.

! Note: On Windows platforms, you can see Marker Preview on the right
hand side of the Open Marker dialog box

Merge Several Markers


This function merges two markers side by side or one over the other. The
default is side by side. To select Merge Above, select Preferences from the
Options Menu and enable Merge Marker Above to the Current.

! Note: If the width and number of layers are not identical in the two marker
files, OptiTex Mark determines and sets the values as follows:

OptiTex Mark selects the wider value between the loaded markers.

OptiTex Mark selects the current number of layers (not the number
in the file you are loading).

Mark Manuel

74

Prepare both markers separately on their actual Marker size and by using the
Merge Few Markers command, the second Marker will be added to the first.
The second Marker will merge at the end of the first one.
To Merge Marker Files:

From the File Menu choose Merge Few Markers. The Open Marker
File dialog box is displayed.

Select the desired DSP file from the File Name list box.

! Tip: Double click the file name to quickly open it.

Click OK. The selected maker will be added to the end of your open
Marker file.

! Tip: By default the merged marker will be placed to the right of the open
marker. If you want the merged marker to be above, go to the
Preference command under Options Menu and enable Merge
Marker above the current.

History
The History command enables the user to save additional information with
each Marker file. This information enables the user to follow up or to retrieve
the positioning of a file at a specific point of time. This allows the company to
create a History Log for each Marker and track the changes to a file according
to dates. Two options are offered. One enables the user to add text description
to the file, The second option enables the user to make a file generation with
the Save Version command allowing the possibility in the future to retrieve
the file layout at certain stages in the design process.

Chapter 3: File Menu

75

To Enable the History Command:


1.

Select History from the File Menu and activate (check)


Automatically Save History on Close.

2.

Click the Close button to leave the History dialog box.

3.

The Save History dialog will open on every Save command.


Comments may be typed in addition to saving the file with all the
information as it is at the moment of the Save command.

To Save History:

The History dialog box is displayed when a file is saved.

The date and user name is automatically noted.

Mark Manuel

76

Type comments in the comment field.

OPTIONAL: Save graphic information by activating (checking) the


Store Version field.

Click OK.

At any point History may be selected from the File Menu to view any
comments attached to the file. Delete messages by clicking the Delete button.

! Note: If a specific layout is saved with the file, the size of the file is going to
be much larger and might cause a delay during File Open. Do not
save information that will not be used, or delete it before the final
save.

Chapter 3: File Menu

77

Open Style File


The Open Style File command is used to create a new marker. It can also be
used to add or merge several design or style files into an existing Marker File
(DSP). It loads a style (DSN) file containing pieces that match the current
material type to make a marker, and allows you to define the following:
Quantities per size, Attributes for material type, Rotate directions and
Quantities of pieces per set.
This is the place to make last minute changes in the marker order. Values can
be redefined and the changes will be good only for the current marker.
OptiTex Mark remembers the last directory where you have saved your DSN
or DSP files, and it will always become the default drive for Open and save.
Open a Style File:
4.

From the File Menu select Open Style File. The Select Style File
dialog box is displayed.

5.

Choose from cutting contour only, sewing contour only, or both


contours.

6.

Click Browse. A second Select Style File dialog box is displayed.

7.

Select the desired .DSN file from the File Name list box and click
Open. The Order For Marker Making dialog box is displayed.

Mark Manuel

78

OPTIONAL: To look in a different directory, double clicks the first option


from the Look In list (usually C:\). A list of directories is displayed. Choose
the directory and file that you wish to open. Click Open. The Order For
Marker Making dialog box is displayed.

! Note: the PASTE button is enable only when there is style file copied to the
Windows clipboard.

To edit martial field and number of set double click on the file name
in the Selected files window. The ORDER TO MARKER
MAKING dialog box.

Chapter 3: File Menu

Enter the material type in the Material field.

Enter number of set to each size if necessary.

Click on the Piece Info tab to display the pieces parameters.

79

Mark Manuel

80
Piece Info Tab:

Material
The material type must be entered for the selected design file. . Only the pieces
in the defined material type will be loaded into the marker. A zero (0) value
for the material type will load all material types. If nothing is entered in the

Chapter 3: File Menu

81

material type, an error message will be displayed as a reminder. If nothing is


entered it will be recognized as (0) and all material types will be loaded.
Piece Name
The piece information displayed on the right side of the dialog box is taken
from the Info. in the DSN file (created in OptiGrade or OptiDig). Highlight the
piece you wish to edit and a picture with information about the highlighted
piece will be displayed. If you change the piece information at marker making
time, the changes are only made to this particular marker. To ensure that the
piece information is the same in all future markers, it is best to change the Info
in the DSN file.
Code
The Code field is used to define a piece code. This field can be used to define
a serial number or perhaps a code number that lets you know the type of piece.
It is another area to define unique information about this piece. To display the
code name on nested pieces, enable the Display Pieces on Marker option in the
Options menu.
Description
The Description can include a name for the piece or a full explanation of the
selected piece. To display the Description on nested pieces, enable the Display
Pieces on Marker option in the Options menu.
Quantity per Set
The Quantity per Set defines the number of copies to be nested on the marker.
The number will be displayed as a counter in the size list. As nesting proceeds,
the quantity will decrease until all pieces have been nested or when the marker
becomes full. Any pattern with a 0 quantity value in OptiGrade will not be
read by the OptiMark nesting application

Mark Manuel

82
Import From Excel

In Optitex 8.0 an order to marker making can be edit in Excel document. To


import the data from the Excel sheet click on the Import From Excel button
and locate the desire excel file.
Export to Excel
In Optitex 8.0 an order to marker making can be edit in Excel document. To
export the data from the Dialog box to Excel file click on the Report to Excel
file and refine the data that will be stored on the excel worksheet.

Click OK to place the files in the Selected Files field of the Select
Style Files dialog box.

! Tip: To merge additional files to the existing DSP file, use this same
procedure starting from step #2.

Click OK to open all files appearing in the Selected Style Files


dialog box. The pieces are displayed at the top of the Marker in the
Piece Display Bar.

Import from SGS Modulate


Modulate maintains a database of Parametric Patterns.
This command display the Modulate Server window, from which you can
select one or more patterns that have been assigned specific dimension values.
To Import CUS file:

From the Select style file dialog box click on the IMPORT
FROM SGS MODULATE button.

Browse the database to locate the desire Modulate file.

Chapter 3: File Menu

Change the dimension value if necessary.

From the FILE menu select LOAD FILE.

! Note: All new DSP files are loaded untitled. To save the file with a specific
file name, use the Save As command in the File menu.

! Tip: To equal all the sizes quantity to all sizes click on the right button of
your mouse while you pointing on the sets quantity field to display a
popup menu. From this menu select equal all .

83

Mark Manuel

84

File Finder
Find and Update command
This application finds Marker (DSP) files and pieces in OptiTex Mark. After
finding, the file can be opened or updated according to the style file.
In order to use the Find and Update application select the File Finder
command from the File menu.

! Note: The Find and Update application is also available in OptiTex PDS.
Find
After setting all search parameters, click on the Find button. The found items
will display at the bottom of the dialog box. There are two items that can be
found Marker Files or Pieces in a Style File.
These two choices affect what will display in the list of found items at the
bottom of the dialog box. For example, a search for pieces with a name
beginning with BA with the selected item to find as Piece will result in a list
of all files containing pieces with a name beginning with BA . The same file
might be listed a few times, because it has several pieces beginning with a
matching name. If the item to find is a Marker File, the file will display only
once even though it has several pieces with a matching name.

Chapter 3: File Menu

Find and Update Dialog Boxes:

85

Mark Manuel

86

! Note: Click on small arrow with the mouse left click to open a drop list
previous fields names or use the mouse right button to open utility box
for editing the previous fields names list:

Find Tab:
The main function of the Find Tab is to look for Marker (DSP) files according
to the OptiTex application it is launched from. When working from the Mark
application, it will manage Marker Files and Pieces within the Marker Files.
While looking for a Marker file in the OptiTex Mark application, the Find
dialog box enables the user to input further search filters, such as Style name,
Piece name, Material type, Piece Description, etc.
Search Options:
Marker File
Type a file name to search for specific Marker Files by file name.
Look in
This field defines the scope of the search to specific directories or sub
directories.

Chapter 3: File Menu

87

Show file name only


Once the Show File Name Only is checked, the finder will look only for
*.DSP file. Otherwise, when unchecked, the finder will look for pieces from
*.DSP files.

! Note: Whenever this command is unchecked, Replace Piece and Delete


Piece in the Update property page will be enabled and vice versa.
Look in sub folders
This option extends the search to sub folders.
Filters:
Piece Name filter
Use this option as a filter. Types a piece name to limit the search to files that
contain a specific piece.
Piece Code filter
Use this option as a filter. Type a piece code to limit the search to files that
contain a specific piece code.
Piece Description filter
Use this option as a filter. Type a piece description to limit the search to files
that contain a specific piece description.
Material filter
Use this option as a filter. Type a material to limit the search to files that
contain a specific material.

Mark Manuel

88
Style Name filter

Use this option as a filter. Type a Style Name to limit the search to a specific
style name.
Match case
When this option is selected the program will find only files that match the
case of the characters in the piece name, style name, file name and material
exactly. Otherwise, the command will finds files with either uppercase or
lowercase characters that match the characters in the piece name, style file
name and material strings.
Match whole word only
When this option is selected the program will find only files that match the
specified piece name, style name, file name and material with no extra
characters. Otherwise, the command matches any string, whether it is a
fragment of a larger string or not.
Options:
Find now
Click this button to activate the search process.
Open file
Click this button to open the selected files in the OptiTex Mark program.
Automatic Update Marker
Click this button to automatically update piece information in the Marker file
from the Style file. This update can be activated on one or more selected files.
Check the Confirm Save check box if you want to confirm manually the

Chapter 3: File Menu

89

saving operation of each marker file.


During the automatic operation you can use the Stop button to stop the
operation.
Confirm Save
Check the Confirm Save check box if you want to confirm manually the
saving operation of each marker file after Automatic Update.
Update Piece Parameters
Select Cutting Contour Only, Sewing Contour Only, or Both Contours to
specify what seam to work on. Often in Mark, only the Cutting Contour is
needed.
Select All
Click this button to select all the files in the current file list.
Stop
Click this button to halt the search operation and return control to the user.
Maximize
Click this button to enlarge the Find & Update dialog box to maximum size.
Cancel
Click this button to quit Find and return to the host application.
Select Tab:
The Select Tab enables you to select and mark the chosen or current piece to
copy or replace in to other files. Click the Get Style File button to access the

90

Mark Manuel

Style Files used in the Marker file that is currently marked in the search list (It
will be in Gray color). The piece names and pieces will display. The Open
button will prompt the standard Open dialog to open a Style File. The piece
names and pieces will display. The Open option enables you to open any file,
even if it is not in the File list.

Chapter 3: File Menu

91

Options:
Get Style File
Click this button to load the selected style file from the file list. The selected
file will be the source file.
Open
Click this button to open a style file.
Update Tab
The Update tab is used in connection with the Select tab. Files may be
updated by adding a piece to a file, replacing a piece in a file, or updating an
existing piece in a file. Multiple files may be selected from the File list to be
updated
To Add a Piece:

First select the target files in the File list.

Select a piece in the source file by using the Select Tab.

Click on the Add Piece button.

The piece from the source file is added to the target file or files in
the File list.

Repeat as above for Replace Piece and Delete Piece clicking on the
appropriate buttons.

! Note: The Update tab can not be used until a source file has been chosen
using the Select Tab.

Mark Manuel

92

Add Piece
Click on this button to add the selected piece in the Select Tab to the current
Marker File, selected in the File list.

Chapter 3: File Menu

93

Replace Piece
Click on this button to replace the selected piece in the Select Tab for the piece
in the current Marker File, selected in the File list.
Delete Piece
Click on this button to delete the piece selected in the file selected in the File
list.
Report Tab
The Report Tab prepares a report describing the contents of one or more DSP
in ASCII (.txt.) format. This report can be imported into applications such as
Word, Excel, Lotus and Access, for editing and/or printing.
Append File
When the Append File checkbox is selected, the report will be added to the
end of an existing report file, rather than create a new file.
Report File Name
This field is used to specify a new file name for the created report, or choose
an existing file name for appending the report.
Report to Data Base
Click this button to create a report from the currently selected style file and
then, save it under the specified file name.
Report to Printer
Click this button to print a report from the currently selected style file or
marker file.

94

Mark Manuel

Chapter 3: File Menu

95

Save (Ctrl + S)
Use the Save command to save the current .DSP (marker) file. The Save
command will save the file displayed on screen to the current path under the
current name. If you are saving the file for the first time, use the Save As
command.

! Note: The DSP extension will be added to the file name automatically. In
Windows 95 or NT the file name can be longer then 8 alphanumerical
characters.
OptiTex Mark remembers the last directory where you have saved your DSN
or DSP files, and it will always become the default drive for Open and Save.
To Save a File:
From the File Menu select Save.
If the file has already been saved, OptiTex Mark will save the file with the
current file name in the already specified drive and directory. To make sure
you are saving with the correct options, choose the Save As command.

Save As
Use the Save As command to save a file for the first time or to ensure the
correct file name and path are specified.
To Use the Save as Command:

From the File Menu select Save As. The Save As dialog box will be
displayed.

Enter the file name.

Mark Manuel

96

OPTIONAL: Select a different drive or directory to save your file.

Click OK.

! Note: The DSP extension will be added to the file name automatically.

Save As Dialog Box:

File Name
The File Name field remains empty until a file name is typed. The file type
will default to DSP unless a different file format has been selected. The File
List field displays the DSP files that exist in the current directory. If there is
more information than what fits in the current file list box, use the scroll bars
to scroll up and down the list.

Chapter 3: File Menu

97

Save as Type
This drop down box determines what types of files will be displayed, it should
say Marker Files (*.DSP) in the Save As Type box.
Attach Preview
A Preview Image is attached to each Marker File. The Default image to be
attached is always the arrangement of the Marker that was on the working area
while the file was saved.
Save in OptiTex-7 Format
Allows you to save the file in Version 7.XX.

Save Current Nesting


The Save Current Nesting command is used when necessary to divide one
order into several markers. Examples of why the entire order cannot be cut
out of one marker are when the fabric can only be spread so long due to
shading, limitations of spreading tables, or the fabric is sold in sheets.
When one marker is full, use Save Current Nesting to save it to a file. A
marker is considered full when no additional pieces can be placed within the
marker limit. The marker limit is defined in the Marker Definitions command
in the Marker menu. During the Save Current Nesting the new marker will be
given a name that is similar to the initial file name, but the last two letters will
be changed to a dash (-) and a number.
For example, if the original file is titled Marker.dsp, all overflow files will be
given the name(s) Marker-1.dsp, Marker-2.dsp and so on.
There are two options with the Save Current Nesting command.
A.

Save the placed (full) marker with all the unplaced pieces listed

Mark Manuel

98

in the Piece Display Bar. The new unplaced marker will also list
the unplaced pieces in the Piece Display Bar.
B.

Save the placed (full) marker with zero remainders listed in the
Piece Display Bar. Only the new unplaced marker will list the
unplaced pieces in the Piece Display Bar.

! Note: The same option exists in the Nesting menu with the AutoSave Save of
Markers command.
To Save the Current Nesting

From the File Menu select Save Current Nesting. The Save Current
Nesting dialog box is displayed.

Enter the name you wish to save the file as.

Click OK.

! Tip: If the original marker was saved with zero remainders, the original
remainders can be updated. Select Open Design Files from the File menu,
double click on each of the Design files listed and select OK.

Chapter 3: File Menu

99

Save Current Nesting Dialog Box:

Browse
Click on the Browse button to specify a name for the original DSP (marker)
file. The additional DSP files will have the same name followed by a hyphen
and a number.
Write Reports to File
Enabling this option will allow the marker information to be reported to the
log file each time a marker is saved or plotted. Click on Change Log to
specify a name for the ASCII log file.
Create NST-file (cncKad)
NST is one of the file formats that are used in the cncKad system. By
enabling this command, a NST file will automatically be created each time the
DSP file is saved.

Mark Manuel

100

Save only nested parts (and zero remainders)


When this command is enabled, the original marker will be saved with zero
remainders, only the new marker will have the unplaced pieces listed in the
Piece Display Bar.

Export to CAD/CAM Files


The Export CAD/CAM file format command converts SGS files to any of the
other graphic standard file formats listed in the dialog box.
Use the Layers table to define which items should be exported to which layer.
The exported file is created using the working units defined in the Option
Menu.
To Export Files:

From the File Menu select Export to CAD/CAM Files. The Export
to CAD/CAM File dialog box is displayed.

Type in the name of the file to be exported.

Click Browse to select drive and directory where the file is to be


exported.

Select the desired file format.

! Note: SGS software recognizes only the basic attributes of the different
ASCII geometry standards for each file format. Situations may arise
where the saved file does not appear exactly as it did in the original
application. The same limitation exists with the Import CAD/CAM
files command. If the file is not importable, uses Import setup and
change the parameters accordingly.

OPTIONAL: Select any other options or set the scale size.

Chapter 3: File Menu

101

Click OK.

Export to CAD/CAM file Dialog Box:

File name
Type a name for the file to export.
Browse
Click on the Browse button to display the Save In dialog box to change drives
and directories.
Contours
This feature is only available when exporting from SGS software. Choose
between Sewing, Cutting, or Sewing and Cutting to define the boundary lines
that will be exported.
Formats:
This area is used to define the type of file to be created. Choose from:

Mark Manuel

102

DXF is an AutoDesk/AutoCAD ASCII file format.


ANSI/AAMA American National Standard for Pattern Data Interchange
formats.
IGES is the Initial Graphics Exchange Specification file format of NBSIR.
CADL is a CADKEYO ASCIIfile format.
NST is the cncKad ASCII file format.
Scale Factor Unit
This is used to define the scale at which the file is to be exported. The default
setting is 1.0 to 1.0 or full scale.
Layers Table
Select this button to view the Layers dialog box. This box is used to define the
layers for each element of the file to be exported.

Chapter 3: File Menu

Layers Table Dialog Box:

103

Mark Manuel

104

Dictionary Dialog Box:

Piece Name
Defines how the export files refers to the piece name.
Piece Code
Defines how the export files refers to the piece code.
Annotation
Defines how the export file refers to the annotation.
Size Name
Defines how the export files refers to the size name.

Chapter 3: File Menu

Base Size Mark


Defines how the export files refers to the base size.
Material Code
Defines how the export file refers to a defined material group.
Quantity
Defines how the export file refers to the quantity.
Best Quality
Defines how the export files illustrates that the following defines the best
quality.
Orientation
Defines how the export file refers to the orientation.
Restore Defaults
Restores the default dictionary names for each item.

105

Mark Manuel

106

Export to DXF and AAMA Setup:

Use DXF Blocks


When this box is enabled, DXF Blocks will be defined in the export file.
Create Point on Notch
This will add point to all the notches that will be import. The point will be
created on the notch base.

Chapter 3: File Menu

107

Create Grading Rules For Notches


This option will enable you to create grading rules for all the notches in the
file that is being exported. It will only work, however, in the AAMA format.
Spline Step
This area is used to define the spline step amount when Dont use Splines is
disabled.
Arc Bulge
This area is used to define the arc bulge amount when Dont use Arcs is
disabled
Number of Arcs Sections
This area is used to define the arc sections when Dont use Arcs is disabled.
Export Buttons Type
Set up how buttons will be export to the marker. If all the check boxes are clear
the buttons will export in the default mode as a circle.
Build Unique Pieces Names
If the Set box is checked, Optimark software will give unique names to all the
exported pieces. The user can also set a maximum number of symbols for the
names of the pieces.

Mark Manuel

108

Import from CAD/CAM Files


The Import CAD/CAM command is an optional piece of software that is
activated within SGS software packages when the Import Module is
purchased.
The Import Module converts any ASCII geometry file format from the list of
recognized formats to the SGS file format. The new file is loaded directly onto
the screen. Files from any directory or disk may be chosen as long as it is a
format recognized by the Import module.

! Note: AutoCAD files can be imported into SGS software regardless if


pieces were originally drawn clockwise or counter clockwise
To Set Up the Import Options:

From the File Menu choose Import CAD/CAM files. The Import
CAD/CAM files dialog box is displayed.

Select the type of file to Import by checking the appropriate file


format under the File Format field.

Click Browse, and a second Import CAD/CAM File dialog box is


displayed.

Select the desired file(s) to import.

! Tip: To select multiple files, hold down the shift key and click on the desired
files.

Click OK. The Import CAD/CAM Files dialog box is displayed


again.

Select the desired Import options.

Chapter 3: File Menu

Click on Setup. The Import Setup dialog box will display.

Select the options and enter the desired values.

Click OK. The Import CAD/CAM Files dialog box will display
again.

Click OK. The selected files are imported with the desired values
and options implemented.

Import CAD files Dialog Box:

109

Mark Manuel

110
CAD Files to Import

This field will list the file to be imported. Click on the Browse button to select
the file or files to be imported.
Working Units
Select the desired working units mm, cm, m, inches, feet, or yards. SGS
software uses the selected working units while converting files from one
format to another. If the units are not correctly defined, the pieces are imported
as the wrong size and the command will have to be repeated.
File Format
Choose the type of file to be imported. Following are the different importable
file formats:
DXF - AutoDesk/AutoCADTM ASCII file format.
AAMA - The American Apparel Manufacturing Association format is
based on the AutoCAD DXF file format. It was confirmed and agreed by all
large CAD/CAM manufacturers.
IGES - Initial Graphics Exchange Specification file format of NBSIR.
CADL - CADKEYTM ASCII file format.
Gerber - Gerber Cutter & Cutting Edge file format.
DFT - cncKad ASCII file format.
HP/GL - General output file format that can be sent to most HPGLcompatible plotters. Approved by the American National Standard of the
Electronic Industrial Association.

Chapter 3: File Menu

111

MICROJET- File format used with the Microdynamics plotters.


Dont Build Sizes
When this box is checked, all sizes of the same piece will appear as separate
pieces on the Piece Bar. When Dont Build Sizes box is unchecked, all sizes of
the same piece will be organized in a Size List under Piece Bar. This is an
automatic procedure while importing files through AAMA format.
OptiMark - Import will try combine sizes of the pieces saved in a format other
than AAMA (e.g. HP-GL), if the Piece Name and the Size information have
been written into each relevant piece before being exported from another CAD
solution. For example: Piece Name: Back, Size: M

! Note: The information to be entered into each piece for proper size
arrangement after Import needs to be in accordance with the
descriptions at the Import Dictionary.
Make DSN files
If this command is enabled, a Style (DSN) File is created when importing a
Marker File.
Material
This field notes the Material Group in Info for the imported file(s).
Quantity
Defines the quantity in Piece Info. For the imported file(s). If an import file
contains several of the same pieces, SGS software reads only one and will
insert the right number of copies into the Piece Info. Box. If there are
differences between the images, SGS software may not recognize that the
pieces are multiples of the same pattern pieces.

Mark Manuel

112
Ignore Internals

Defines the specific components to be imported from the import file.


Eliminating specific components, like Notches, Texts, Lines, Arcs, or Circles,
speeds the Import procedure. Selecting the Ignore Notch or Internals option
(Lines, Arcs, Circles, or Text), does not mean that these elements are not read.
In this case, these elements are read without being identified or sorted. For
example, a V notch on the piece perimeter becomes part of the contour rather
than being recognized as a having a V notch attribute.
OK
Click on the OK button after selected the file to Import. The file is imported.
Box
Click on this button to import a file within a closed contour box. This option
is used to bring in information if the file will not import properly. Use his
option when an error dialog box appears such as Entities Out of Contour or
No Closed Contours Found.
Setup
Click on the Setup button to display the Import Setup Dialog Box.

Chapter 3: File Menu

113

Import Setup Dialog Box:

Tolerance
The Tolerance Value determines the farthest distance two points on a contour
can be placed apart and still be treated as the same perimeter (SGS software
usually handles only properly closed contours. However, the tolerance value
ensures that some contours that are not closed properly will be read).

Mark Manuel

114
Bulge Chord Error

Bulge Chord Error is a parameter used to define the smoothness of Curves and
Arcs. A smaller value creates many additional points and segments within the
piece.
Min. Area:
Piece
If a piece boundary is smaller than the value defined in this box, the Import
command disregards the piece and throws the piece away.
Hole
A hole is a closed contour on the same layer as the piece boundary. Use this
area to define the minimum size of a hole. The minimum area of a hole should
be smaller than the smallest piece.
Default Internals Sizes
These fields define the default settings for internals when importing from
another file format.
Button
This field is used to set the default size for the radius of a button.
Notch Depth
This field is used to set the default depth of a notch.
Notch Width
This field is used to set the default for the width of a notch.

Chapter 3: File Menu

115

Text Size
This field is used to set the default for text size. If a text size was defined in
the Imported file, SGS software maintains that value. Text is information
typed directly onto the piece. Piece Description text is defined using the
Dictionary dialog box.
V Notchs Items Max - Angle
This area is used to define the maximum angle of a V notch.
Near Angle
This area is used to define the smallest near angle of a V notch.
Min Circle Radius
This field defines the smallest size of an internal circle that will be imported.
Max Notch Ratio
The largest difference when dividing the width by the depth of the notch.
Max Notch Depth
The maximum depth for a notch.
Spline Angle
The smallest angle for curved lines.
Max Grade Angle
The maximum angle for a grading point.

Mark Manuel

116
Import Setup Options

Ignore CR. / LF
Mainly for CNC files which come in one long line, or use a CR./LF after each
point. When enabled, the Carriage Return/Line Feed in the import file is
ignored.
Ignore Frame
SGS software ignores the outer frame (boundary), which is usually created for
Plot files.
Separate Layers
SGS software remembers the layer of each element. If the new file is ever
exported, the elements keep their original layers. This option is used only for

Chapter 3: File Menu

117

DXF files. Because SGS software recognizes elements and text on different
layers, a circle inside a shape may make a noticeable difference in the
imported file. If the circle is imported while the Separate Layers option is
disabled, the circle becomes a simple internal element. If the circle is to be
recognized as a hole, it must be on the same layer as the outer perimeter line,
or the DXF file can be imported with the Separate Layers option in the OFF
position
Join Pieces
This new command, enables you to Join Pieces manually and recognize them
as the same piece. This function can be used after import of a DXF or another
external CAD/CAM file. The recognition will accept a variation of about 2%
in the area between the first piece and its copies.
-

Mark the pieces in the Piece List bar. Select the first piece.

By the use of the Shift key Mark the second and any other related
pieces.

Use the command Join Pieces from the Piece Info. Menu.

If the marked pieces really match each other with only minor change,
they will appear as one piece, which is the first marked piece.

Auto Recognition of Internal Elements


Convert the longest line to baseline: this option will convert the longest line in
the piece to a baseline. This option is not available for the AAA format. Check
On-Contour V-notches in AAMA files: this option will double check all the V
notches that are located on the piece contour in the AAMA format

Mark Manuel

118
Stripe Adjust

This command acts as an on/off toggle switch when working with Stripe,
Plaid, and floral material. When activated, all same-type pieces will be
adjusted to match the relative stripe coordinates of the first piece placed on the
marker. The matching point for the pieces are determined using notches or
buttons with stripe adjust numbers from 1 to 4 or by using the Stripe Adjust
Group (see Marker menu, Stripe Definition and Relate Pieces to Stripes
commands and Group menu, Stripe Adjust Group).
Auto Recognition Pieces Descriptions from Internal Text
This option allows you to choose one of the 4 display types:
Disable: this will disable the software from recognizing piece descriptions

Piece Name: this will only recognize the name of the piece

Piece Name and Code: this will recognize the name of the piece as
well it's code

Piece Name, Code and Description: this will recognize the name of
the piece, it's code as well as it's description from internal text.

Auto Recognition Size Names from Internal Text


This option will allow the software to automatically recognize size names
from the internal text of the pieces. You have 2 options:
Yes: this box will enable this option
Numerical Only: this box will recognize only numerical values as valid size
names
Max. Number of Symbols setting allows you to delimit the size name

Chapter 3: File Menu

Layers Table Dialog Box:


This dialog box is only available when importing AAMA files.

Format
The import format that was defined in the Import to CAD file Dialog Box.
Only AAMA files support Layers.
Boundary Lines
The layer name/number to place piece boundary lines on.
Turn (Grade) Points
The layer name/number on which to place turn (grade) points.

119

Mark Manuel

120
Curve Points

The layer name/number on which to place curve points.


Notches
The layer name/number on which to place notches.
Grain (Base) Lines
The layer name/number on which to place the grain (base) line.
Internal Lines (draw)
The layer name/number on which to place internal lines. If internal lines are
used and they are to be cut with an Automatic cutter, they should appear on the
same layer as the outer perimeter. Otherwise, they will become internal
elements with Draw attributes.
Internal Cut
The layer name/number on which to place internal cuts. If internal lines are
used and they are to be cut with an Automatic cutter, they should appear on the
same layer as the outer perimeter. Otherwise, they will become internal
elements with Draw attributes.
Drill Holes
The layer name/number on which to place drill holes.
Sew Lines
The layer name/number on which to place sew lines.

Chapter 3: File Menu

121

Quality Lines
The layer name/number on which to place quality lines.
Restore Defaults
This button is used to restore the default layers for each item.

Dictionary Dialog Box:


The Dictionary dialog box enables SGS software to add attributes and data
to each imported piece and save this data with the Piece Info. SGS software
looks for the defined string and then uses the defined value or text that
expresses the string parameter.

Mark Manuel

122
Style Name

Defines how the import program searches for the style name.
Piece Name
Defines how the import program searches for the piece name. If a piece name
string is not defined, the longest line of text in the import file becomes the
Piece Name.
Piece Code
Defines how the import program searches for the piece code.
Annotation
Defines how the import program searches for annotation.
Size Name
Defines how the import program searches for the size name.
Base Size Mark
Defines how the import program searches for the base size.
Material Code
Defines how the import program searches for the fined material group.
Quantity
Defines how the import program searches for the defined quantity.

Chapter 3: File Menu

123

Best Quality
Defines how the import program searches for the defined best quality.
Orientation
Defines how the import program searches for the defined orientation.
Restore Defaults
This button is used to restore the default dictionary names for each item.

Plot
About Plotting
Use the Plot command to Plot or Cut the displayed pieces. Files can be plotted
at a plotting device connected directly to one of the serial ports on your
machine, or plots can be plotted to a plotting device connected to a network.
The new Output Control Center (OCC) is a utility that manages plot files as
well as queues on local and networks computers.
Use the print manager of your choice. The OutMan (Output Manager) is a
Windows utility supplied by SGS software, which manages files. Files can be
sent to up to eight different serial printers or plotters. The QMan works in coordination with the OutMan and acts as a spooler for the different plot files.
The OutMan also works in a network situation. From different workstations,
network files can be sent to different devices and OutMan plots them without
interfering with the regular workflow of SGS Applications.
If the OutMan is selected, enable the use of OutMans application in the Plot
dialog box. Also, refer to the Configuring SGS Software to Your Plotter
section in the Installation and setup chapter of the manual.

Mark Manuel

124

There is a difference between the Plot and Print commands. Plot is used when
using the OutMan print spooler to support your large pen plotters (Gerbers and
Iolines) and InkJet/Dot Matrix plotters (HP600, EnCad, AlgoTex, and the
CalComp InkJet). A4/Letter paper size is referred to as small, and all paper
sizes larger than this are referred to as large.
Print is used when using the Windows print spooler and windows to support
your small InkJet/Laser/Dot Matrix printer (such as HP, Canon etc.).

! Note: If you use only one plotter, you will not have to select and configure a
plotter each time. The configuration will be saved in the
OUTMAN.INI. If you have more than 1 plotter, once they are
configured you will only have to specify the PLTR#.
Plotter Installation
Make sure that your plotter is installed and turned on.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.
Plotter (Output Manager) Setup
In order to use the plot command to send a job to an existing plotter, SGS
software must be configured properly. The Plotter Setup command defines the
communication parameters for the plotters in use. Up to 8 different plotters
can be defined in a network.

! Note: Select between the OutMan and the OCC as the output manager in
the Plot dialog box. The "Use Output Manger" must be checked.

! Note: The communication parameters in the computer output port should


have been previously set to match the same parameters in the output
device. A print manager for a Local or Network Plotter should have
also been installed. For more information, refer to the Configuring
SGS software To Your Plotter section in the end of this book.

Chapter 3: File Menu

125

Setting the OutMan as Output Manager

From the Plot dialog box select the OutMan as output manager.

From the File Menu choose Plotter (Output Manager) Setup. The
Plotter Setup Dialog box is displayed

Enable the Output Manager by clicking the box. A small V is placed


in the box.

Next, specify where the settings you select are to be saved; to do


this you will need to locate your Output Manager INI file. Click
Browse to view your directories. The Output Manager INI File
dialog box will be displayed.

Select the OptiTex directory. (The file Outman.ini automatically


displays in the File Name field.)

Click OK. The Plotter Setup dialog box is displayed with the
selected Outman.ini path shown

! Note: The SGS PDS, Grading, and Marking software all use the same
OutMan and Plotter Setup dialog boxes. Some options only apply to
PDS and are not accessible in the Marking software, and vise-versa.

Select the plotter by clicking the drop down arrow to the right of the
current plotter and select the appropriate PLTR#.

! Note: The number of plotters in the list depends on how many plotters were
specified during the Marking program Installation procedure.

Click OK.

Mark Manuel

126

To Output Using the OutMan Print Manager:

From the File menu choose Open. The Open dialog box will
display.

Select the desired Design file.

! Tip: To open a file quickly, double click the file name.

Click OK to open the file. Select a piece.

From the File menu select Plot. The Plot dialog box is displayed.
Verify that the correct file is displayed in the file name box. If not,
click Browse and select the correct file.

Select the desired options.

! Tip: Verify that the correct Set up, paper size and plotter width, have been
selected prior to clicking OK.

Click OK to save changes and exits the Plot Setting Dialog Box.
The pieces will be plotted or cut.

! Tip: Once a file has been sent to the OutMan, you can continue to work at
your computer.
SGS software uses the WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) system
while printing and plotting. This means that what you see (on the screen) is
what you get from the output device.

Chapter 3: File Menu

127

Setting the Output Control Center (OCC) as your plotting spooler


The Output Control Center (OCC) is a 32 bit spooler that supports both serial
and parallel communication.
To prepare a queue for the OCC spooler, use Plotter Setup wizard dialog
box:

In order to run Plotter Setup wizard dialog box follow the next steps:

Select Use Output Manager option from Plot dialog box.

! Note: if Use Output Manager is disabled you need to set outman.ini file
from Plotter Select /outman Setup dialog box.

Now select OCC from Output Manager Service section on plot


dialog box.

Mark Manuel

128

! Note: if OCC queue is empty a message box that There is no default


queue will be opened, use OK button to open Plotter Setup
wizard dialog box. If you choose Cancel button a message box that
Failed to create a default queue will be opened.

Use Setup button in Output Manager Service section to load


Plotter Setup wizard dialog box.

Creating a new queue with Plotter Setup wizard dialog box:

Click on the Add button to add a new plotter queue.

Select "My Computer" if your computer is a local computer


(computer that is connected to the printer/plotter). If your computer
is a remote computer, select "Network Computer".

In case of a local computer queue Communication setting page


will be open:

Communication Protocol OCC spooler supports four different protocol


types:
Standard Protocol - Use this protocol to drive serial plotters with RS 232
communication interface.

Chapter 3: File Menu

129

Gerber Protocol Use this protocol to drive Gerber ACCUPLOT machines:


300, 310, 320 and 750.
Lectra Protocol Use this protocol to drive Lectra E-32 and E-33 machine
(Lectra Flypen machine uses different protocol).
OptiJet Protocol Use this protocol to drive OptiJet printer.

Communication Attribute and Communication Parameters If you are driving


a serial machine select correct communication parameters: Port, Baud Rate,
Parity, Data Bits, Stop Bits, CTS/RTS, XON/XOFF, DTR Signal and RTA
signal. If you are driving a parallel machine, select only the correct LPT port.
In case of a remote computer queue, Net Work Plotter page will be
opened.

Mark Manuel

130

You can type the name of the remote Computer (the computer that is
connected to the machine) and click Connect, or double click on Entire
Network tree to browse and find your computer.
Once you find your computer, click on the+ sign to see the plotters shared
on this computer. Select the desired plotter, then Finish.

Last page Local Plotter Setting The Local Plotter Setting page
is only for a local computer queue:

Plotter Name Give your new queue a name (this queue name will
be displayed on OptiTex plot dialog and in the OCC tree queues).

Plotters Queue Folder This is OCC queue folder path, you will be
able to find your new queue under the queue folder. This is highly
recommended not to change the queue folder path!

! Note: Each queue folder contains two different file types:


*.job this file is an OCC property file which holds all job attribute like: Job
status, etc.
*.out this file contain the plotting data (HG-GL, DM-PL, AP-GL etc).

Chapter 3: File Menu

131

Shared Plotter Use this option to share you queue directory.

! Note: In case that your operating system is Windows 95, 98 or millennium,


you need to share the queue directory and OCC directory manually!!
Use Finish button to make a new plotting queue.

After creating a new plotting queue the Plotter Setup dialog box
will show the new queue in the queue list.

Select the new queue from the queues list and set this new queue as
a default queue by using Set Default button or double click.

Now use Close button to close Plotter Setup dialog box.

132

Mark Manuel

! Note: After you close Plotter Setup dialog box, plotter/cutter setup dialog
box will show, choose the correct parameters for you machine and
confirm your selection with OK. where the plotter is connected.
Plotter connected to network computer
You can type the name of the remote Computer (computer with the plotter)
and click Connect, or double click on Entire Network to browse and find your
computer. Once you find your computer, click on the + sign to see the plotters
shared on this computer.
Select the desired plotter, then Finish.
You can now ready to plot to a remote plotter across your network.
Adding Plotter on Local Computer
Select the Port (COME, LP, etc) your plotter is connected to, then Next.
give the plotter queue a name For each plotter a Queue is created to hold,
process and store files for your plotter. The default location will be displayed
in the Plotters Queue Folder. To change the Queue location, click on the
Browse button then select the desired location for the Queue.

Chapter 3: File Menu

Check the Shared Plotter box to make this plotter is available to other
computers.
Once you have the desired settings, click Finish to add the selected device.
Plot Dialog Box:

133

Mark Manuel

134
File Name

The File Name field contains the destination and name of the plot or cut file
that you are creating. To select a different file name or directory click on
Browse.
Use Output Manager
This option must be enabled to use the OutMan or the OCC. The output
mangers allow automatic plotter, if the OutMan or the OCC are not enabled,
the plot file is created and stored in the displayed directory. Then, the plot file
has to be copied to the appropriate port.
Network Plotting
Enable this command when plotting through the network.
Output Manager Service
Choose between the OCC (Output Control Center) or the OutMan.
Alert on Start
When this option is enabled, a message will alert the user that the job is about
to start plotting. This message is displayed on the screen of the computer
attached to the plotter. Click OK to proceed.
Alert on End
When this option is enabled, a message will alert the user that the job has
finished plotting. This message is displayed on the screen of the computer
attached to the plotter. Click OK to proceed.

Chapter 3: File Menu

135

Remove on End
When this option is enabled, the plot file is deleted after it is plotted.
Copies
This option allows specification of he number of copies to be plotted.
Plot to Ftp
This option enables you to upload the plot file to ftp server.
How To Use The FTP Plot Utility Feature:
There are three basic things that OptiTex user should have in Order to use the
new FTP plot utility feature:

IP address (Internet protocol) of the destination computer.

Password in case that the destination computer is password


protected.

User Name in case other users share the destination computer.

Now, you can contact your computer using standard network cable to the
destination computer network.
After you connect to your network follow the following steps:

Go to Plot Dialog box.

Use Setup button in FTP Plot section in order to open ftp dialog
box:

Insert the destination Computer IP addresses to Address windows

Mark Manuel

136

and if there is a need, insert User name and Password.

Now press on Browse button to access your destination computer


network (the access process can take some time).

From the Select Working directory windows select the working


directory which will be a target directory for the plot will.? On the
Path windows the selected directory path will be displayed (you
cant edit the path on the Path windows).

Confirm your selection with Ok button.

On the Plot dialog check Use FTP plot option.

Send the plot file to this destination using Ok on plot dialog box.

Log File Reports Use


This option writes plot information to a log file that contains information about
the marker, number of pieces placed and material usage. The log file can then
be used for tracking plotted files. To view the log file, use a text editor or
select Solutions Reports from the Nesting Menu.
Change Log
Click on Change Log to change the text file to which the plot information is
written.
Note (Custom Header)
This option allows the user to type in notes or instructions and plots them at
the end of the marker in the header. Note that if Marker Header is disabled,
the notes do not plot.

Chapter 3: File Menu

137

Plotter/Cutter Setting
This option displays the plotter type in use and how it is configured. It also
displays the plotter page size. Plotters and plotter settings can be changed in
the Plotter Setting dialog box. To open the Plotter Settings dialog box click on
Setup.
Plot Setting Dialog Box:
The Plot Setting dialog box can be accessed through the Plot dialog box.

Mark Manuel

138
Device Name

Name is the assigned name of the plotter. Up to 8 plotters can be defined.


They are listed as PLTR1, PLTR2, etc. The name can be changed in the Plotter
Setup command.
Driver Format
This option displays the Language the plotter is using. Consult your
plotter/cutter manual for language information or call the Fax Back Service (1800-766-6644) for specific information related to your plotter or cutter. Plotter
Size. Each output device, whether it is a plotter or a cutter, is treated as a
plotter. Each kind of an X Y machine has its own type of command file or
language. The following plotter types are supported:
DMPL (*.DMP)
HPGL (*.HPG)
HPGL PlotTec (*.HPT)
HPGL Generic (*.HPG)
HPGL/2

(*.HP2)

Design Partner
IOLS (*.IOL)
EIA (*.EIA)
Cybrid Plotter
Cybrid Cutter/Plotter

(*.DP)

Chapter 3: File Menu

139

Mutoh Plotter
APGL Gerber Plotter (*.GGT)
AP700 Plotter
Gerber Cutter (*.GBR)
Eastman Cutter (*CMD)
Cutting Edge Cutter (*NC)
Wild Plotter/Cutter
Wild Plotter (*.WIL)
Microjet (*STD)
External Format

Device Options
Page in Center
This option keeps jobs aligned when using more than one page. Most plotters
have their 0/0 point located at the Bottom Left point of the paper, although
some may have their 0/0 point set at the center of the page. If using a plotter
that has a 0/0 point at the center, enable this option. This orientation setting is
used primarily for flat bed plotters.
Manual Frame Advance
This option is used primarily on flat bed plotters and plotters that do not feed
paper automatically. The plot stops at the end of each page to allow for paper

Mark Manuel

140

replacement. If this option is enabled, the Enter key must be pressed after each
page.
Use CR/LF in Code
Certain Gerber Cut Formats only use this option. Some Gerber cutters require
a new line after each command and some do not. The best way to check if
your cutter needs to have a new line is to look at one of its example files. If the
file is one long paragraph, this command is not necessary. If the file starts each
command on a new line, this option must be enabled.
Use Initialization in File Header [<M70>/<IN>/]
Some Gerber Cut Formats use this option. When enabled, it instructs the cutter
to stop and wait for the user permission to continue/start the job. Not all
Gerber plotters support this command. Consult the Gerber Users Manual for
information on plotter/cutter support.
Use Bite Offset
This option is only supported by the Gerber Cut format. When enabled, it
instructs the plotter to put a small alignment mark on the fabric at the end of
each frame. The small mark is placed outside the Marker area so as not
interfere with the actual marker.
Plotter Page Size
Determines the working area of the plotter. The program will remember the
last setting even if it was for a different plotter. X is the length of the frame or
the endless length of the paper roll. Y is the width of the paper. For
information on a specific plotter or cutter, call the Fax Back service (1-800766-6644) for instructions related to the plotter or cutter of your choice.

Chapter 3: File Menu

141

Gap after Plotting


This is the space the plotter puts at the end of the plot job. The default is 0.
Minimal Plot/Cut line
This option is only used for some Gerber plotters. It specifies the minimum
distance at which a line is still being cut. It saves plotting/cutting time to not
cut two points that are too close to one another.
Min. Plot Spline Segment
Minimum Plot Spline Segment is similar to the Bulge Corde Error. It converts
any arc segment under a certain size to a simple straight line in order to save
time.
File Header
by using the this command you can add and customize header to the file . type
in the desire command for piloting to Gerber plotter which do no support the
<m70> command.
File Footer
by using the this command you can add and customize footer to the file . type
in the desire command for piloting to Gerber plotter which support a file
footer.

Mark Manuel

142
Font Options:
Use Plotters Built in Fonts

When this option is enabled, the plotter substitutes the fonts used on the
computer with its own built in fonts. Not all plotters have built in fonts.
Consult the plotters manual for font information. Using the plotters built in
font speeds up plotting.
Plotter Font File
Click Browse to select a font file. The Open Font File dialog box displays
allowing a font to be selected from a specific drive or directory. If Use
Plotters Built in Fonts is disabled, you must use the .FNT file.
Default Font Size (Inches)
This is the font size, which the plotter automatically uses if no other size is
specified. The default is .315.
Tools Setup Tab
The new tools setup feature enables OptiTex users to plot different line type
according to tool number or tool type.
There are several different plotter formats to support different lines type:
HG-PL, DM-PL, HG-PL/2, Wild Plotter, AP 700 Plotter, Muto Plotter etc'

! Tip: You can use OptiTex new feature to select a tool name, just click with
mouse right button on "Tool Number/Layer Name" section and a
dialog box will be open:

Chapter 3: File Menu

143

How to work with "Tool Setup" tab on "Plot Setup" dialog box:
The new tools setup feature enables OptiTex users to plot different line types
according to tool numbers or tool types.
There are several different plotter formats, which are support different lines
type:
HG-PL, DM-PL, HG-PL/2, Wild Plotter, AP 700 Plotter, Muto Plotter, etc.'

144

Mark Manuel

How to define a special tool for a selected element:

To define a special tool number for a selected piece use "Tool Number/Layer
Name" section on "Piece Info" dialog or "Cut Order" dialog on Piece menu.

To define a special tool number for an internal element use "Tool


Number/Layer Name" section on internal element attribute dialog box.. Select
the desired internal element and use the double click function to open the
attribute dialog box (you select the internal and then open the internal attribute
dialog box from "Edit" menu). You can also add a special tool number for
internal on "Cut Order" dialog box.

! Tip: You can use the new OptiTex feature to select a tool name:, just click
with right mouse button on "Tool Number/Layer Name" section and a
dialog box will open:

Insert the tool number in the "Head Number" column on the corresponding
rows according the desired tool or command type. Remember you can only
use numeric names in the "Head Number" column!
Select the desired line type from the list. Don't forget to fill in the tool number
into the "Number of Heads" windows

Chapter 3: File Menu

145

Number of Heads
This option is used with multi-pen plotters or plotters that have one pen and
one knife.
Default Pens
Default Pens commands allow to select a specific tool for a specific command
(cut, draw and cut internals). Default Pens commands are enabled in several
formats like, HP-GL, DM-PL, HP-GL/2 etc.
For example:
Your output device working with HP-GL formats and has three tools:
The Tools setting are:
Number of Heads = 3.
Draw = 2.
Cut Contour = 1.
Cut Internals = 3.
Explanation:
Tool number one will be using for an element that has attribute cut.

Mark Manuel

146

Tool number two will be using for an element that has attribute draw.
Tool number three will be using for an element that has attribute cut internals.

Plot Options
Plot Continuous
Select this option to plot continuously. Plotters with roll paper generally plot
continuously. Plotters with manual page feed do not plot continuously.

! Note: If the actual marker is wider than the plotter, the selected option is
Scale equal to 1 X 1 and Continuous Plot is enabled, then special
marks are plotted to join two or more sections of the plot.
Marker Header
When this option is enabled, general maker information such as size, plies, and
number of pieces placed, notes, etc. is plotted at the end of the marker.
Marker Boundary
When this option is enabled, the marker boundary or frame is plotted around
the marker edge.
Scale Factor
This option specifies the scale in which the image is to plot. The default scale
is 1 to 1.
One Frame
This option scales the selection to fit on one plotter page and works in
conjunction with Plot Continuous.

Chapter 3: File Menu

147

Frame Advance After Last Frame


This option when using a pen plotter that plots in defined frames. (For
example, the Ioline 600 plots in 46 frames) It is necessary to check this
option so that the plotter will advance after plotting the first frame.
Whole Pieces in Frame Only
This option is using with flat bead plotters/cutters. When this option is
enabled any piece that is not within the frame in whole will not be plotted or
cut.
Order by Tools
This option is used when more than one pen or knife is used to cut or draw the
marker. When enabled, all sections assigned to one tool can be sent at the
same time: all the notches are cut or plotted first, then drills, then punches, and
then the cut sequence. This allows for a changing of tools between sections.
Pens (Tools) According to Sizes
When using a multiple pen plotter, it is possible to assign each size a different
pen. Select this option to enable plotting with pens according to size.
Check Intersections before Plotting
The marker is plotted exactly as it appears on the screen (WYSIWYG).
When this option is enabled, the software checks the marker for overlapping
pieces and displays a warning message if any found. The overlapping pieces
will be plotted as they are, if this option is not checked.

Mark Manuel

148
Optimize Plot/Cut Order

This command is used to define a portion of the marker to be optimized for


plotting or cutting. If selected, an additional dialog box will be opened where
the optimization limits can be defined.
Bulge (Corde Error) Inches
The Bulge Corde Error setting is the smallest size at which an arc can appear
and still be plotted as an arc. When plotting arcs with very small bulge chords
(practically straight lines) it is faster to plot them as straight lines. This saves
plotting time. If the Bulge Corde Error is set to 0, the curve is plotted, no
matter how slight.

Plotter Setup
! Note: the plotter setup dialog box is different between the OutMan and the
OCC.
Plotter Setup Dialog (OutMan manager)

Use Output Manager


Select this option to use the Output Manager provided by SGS. When this
option is disabled, the plot file is created but is not sent to the output device.

Chapter 3: File Menu

149

Output Manager INI File:


The default INI file is C:\OPTITEX\OUTMAN.INI. If a different INI file is
desired, select Browse to display the Output Manager INI-File dialog box and
select the appropriate file.
Current Plotter
Select the plotter to be used in the Current Plotter drop down box. Up to 8
different plotters can be configured in a server setting.

Plotter Setup Dialog (OCC)

Select the plotter to be used in the plot command.

The plotter can be set as default by clicking the SET DEFAULT


button

Mark Manuel

150

Click "Close"

Print
Use the Print command to output pieces to a printer. The Printer drivers are
part of Microsoft Windows, so SGS software displays the printer driver(s) that
was (were) selected when Microsoft Windows was installed.
The Print command uses Windows printer drivers and spoolers; therefore, the
output device must be installed through the Windows Setup before printing
takes place.
Print is used when using the Windows print spooler to support small
InkJet/Laser/Dot Matrix printer (such as HP, Canon etc.). A4/Letter paper size
is referred to as small, and all paper sizes larger than this are referred to as
large. Text sent to printer can be different from the text seen on screen. Use
the Fonts Command in the Options Menu to change the font type and size
To Print a File:

From the File Menu select Print or click the Print icon on the tool
bar. The Print dialog box is displayed.

Select the desired printing options.

Click OK.

Chapter 3: File Menu

Print Dialog Box:

Choose what to print:


Marker, Pieces and Report
Format Options
Single page
Use this option to print your marker on a single printer page.
Multiple pages
Use this option to print your marker on multiple pages.

151

Mark Manuel

152
Fixed Scale

Use this option to print a real scale of your marker.


Options
Only current Piece
Use this option to print only the selected piece.
Marker Header
Use this option to print your marker header (In OptiTex marker is all the
information that displayed on marker status bar).
Marker Boundary
Use this option to print a frame around the printed marker.
Print X-direction
This option is available only when Fixed Scale option is selected. Use Print
X- direction option to divide the printed frames on the X- direction (length),
the default is Y- direction (width).
Print Continuous
This option is available only when Fixed Scale option is selected. Use Print
Continuous option to send all the printed pages continuously.
Check Intersection
Use this option to check for intersections on your marker before sending the
marker to printing.

Chapter 3: File Menu

153

Report to File
Use this option to send your marker file into a text report. The Report to File
option in available only one the Report check box is checked.

! Note: When you send you report into a file, Report to Excel dialog will be
open.
Weight per sq
Use this option (only when the report check box is checked) to calculate the
fabric weight on your current marker. Remember to insert your fabric weight
ser sq - working units (if your square working units are inches it will be
sq.inches) into the Weight per sq windows.

! Note:Use this field to add any text information into your printed marker
header.

Report to Excel and E-Mail utilities


Generates a report in Excels native format from OptiTex PDS and
E-Mails the report and the file directly from OptiTex PDS.
The style file can be converted to excel file and can be mailed and reported by
using this dialog box.

Mark Manuel

154

Report Contains
Marker Drawing
Use this option to draw your marker into your Excel report.
Pieces / Order Information
Use this option to add information on your marker order into your Excel
report.
Internal Information
Use this option to add your Excel report information abut the size, quantity of
the internals elements (buttons, notches etc) in your marker.

Chapter 3: File Menu

155

Detailed Piece Information


Use this information to add your Excel report information on pieces: pieces
perimeter, pieces area etc.
Excel File
By clicking on the button you can browse the files on yours hard drive
and define the name of the excel file to be created.
You can set excel file visible and the after saving the file it will be opened
automatically.
Other option is to appended report to existing file and then the report will be
added at the end of the Excel file that has been chosen at the upper field.
MetaFile
To create a MetaFile you must check the box.
The scale X and scale Y fields gave the option to increases or decrees the size
of the MetaFile.
"" by clicking this button you can browse your drive to locate the place
that the file will be saved
Mail
OptiTex can mail the style files to any mail recipient. You can attendee to the
massage 3 different files.
DSN file mail the style file as he saved by optitex.
Excel report mail the excel file.

Mark Manuel

156

MetaFile mail a picture witch can insert to any office document or can be
opened with acrobat reader.
To Mail a File:

The E-MAIL dialog box appears.

Enter the e-mail address that you want to sand the massage to.

You have the option to attach more files and to add the massage
name and subject.

Click O.K.

The massage with the attached files will be sand to the desire address

Chapter 3: File Menu

157

Send To
Enter the mail recipient e-mail address. E-mail massages can be mail to
unlimited number of recipients.
Attachment
To add files to the e-mail massage check the Add current file box and the
Add Files button to locate the files to sand.

Exit (Alt+F4)
Select the Exit command to close the Style File and exit the program.
To Exit the Program:
From the File menu chooses Exit or press ALT+F4.

158

Mark Manuel

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

159

Chapter 4: Piece Menu


Piece information and attributes can be changed in the Piece Menu by using
Info, Piece Info, or Global Info dialog boxes. The changes made in these
dialog boxes will only be applied to the open marker file. For permanent
changes to piece information and attributes, it is best to make changes using
Global Info or Info in the Optitex PDS program.

! Note: A marker can hold up to 800 pieces with an unlimited number of


plies. There can be up to 900 pieces, including all sizes, in the Piece
Display Bar. Each pattern contour can have up to 1000 segments.
Each piece can have no more than 100 internal elements. If these
quantities are insufficient, please contact your local dealer.

Info (Ctrl+I)
This command is used to verify, update and change all text and parameters of
the selected piece and size. The Piece Information includes the style and piece
name, code, description, number of copies and current plies, remainders,
buffering information, area and perimeter measurements, priority in auto
nesting, orientation of the piece, rotation limits, locked piece and flipping
information.

Mark Manual

160
Piece Information dialog:

To Use Piece Info:

From the Piece Menu, select Info or press CTRL + I. The Piece
Information dialog box will be displayed with the current settings
for the highlighted pattern piece.

Select the desired options.

Click Apply.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

161

While the Piece Info Dialog Box is displayed, the next piece or size can be
edited by clicking on the desired piece or size in the Piece Display Bar. The
attributes for the highlighted piece will be displayed in the Piece Information
dialog box.
Piece Name
The piece name field is used to define the name of the piece.
Code
The code field is used to assign the pattern piece a code number.
Description
The description field is used to describe the selected piece. The description
will be printed in the Piece Info report.
Block Size
The X and Y distance of a piece that has been Block Fused.
Quantity
The total number of copies to be nested on the marker. The number will
appear as a counter in the size list. As nesting proceeds, the quantity in the size
list will decrease until all pieces have been nested or the marker is full.
Plies
The number of current plies used on the marker. Using the optimum
calculations in the marker menu can change the number of plies.

Mark Manual

162
Remainders

The number of extra pieces calculated for the current marker.


Buffer Size
A buffer area is applied around the full perimeter of all the pieces in the
selected size. The working units used are the same as those used for marker
dimensions.

! Note: If a buffer value has been specified, the contour of the piece will
appear increased on the marker unless Buffered Contour is unchecked
in the Pieces on Marker dialog box under the Display Menu.

! Tip: Select Up, Down, Right, or Left to add a Buffer to a specific side of the
piece.

! Note: Check which working units are being used before changing the
buffering of a piece. Be careful not to mix your working units (there
are two working units fields Liner and Area).
Area
The surface area covered by the piece. The units of measurement are the same
as those used for marker dimensions. If the marker is 54 x 54 inches, the area
is displayed in inches. The area is net value. If a buffer was declared, it will
also be included in the area value.
Perimeter
The boundary distance around the piece. The units of measurement are the
same as those used for marker dimensions.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

163

Orientation
This area is used to define if the piece is a right, left, or unknown. If there are
2 copies requested and Both is checked, one right and one left piece will be
placed on the marker. If there are 2 copies requested and Both is unchecked,
two identical pieces will be placed on the marker. If Left or Right is defined
an L and/or an R will be displayed on the nested piece in the piece description.
Folding Allowed
When placing a tubular marker, some pieces can be folded along the top
and/or bottom edge of the marker edge. Use the Fold Up/Down option to
specify which pieces can be folded. When placing a perfectly spread face to
face marker, some pieces can be folded along the left and right edge of the
marker edge. Use the Fold Left/Right option to specify which pieces can be
folded.
Directions
When nesting pieces, OptiMark will attempt to rotate pieces to obtain the best
fit within the marker. Pattern Pieces many be assigned one-way rotation, twoway rotation, four-way rotation, or anyway rotation. With one-way rotation, a
piece has no rotation. Two-way rotation allows the piece to rotate in 180degree increments. Four-way rotation allows the piece to rotate in 90-degree
increments. When an Anyway rotation is defined, the piece can rotate any
amount.
Flip Allowed
Flip Allowed option allows the pattern piece to be flipped in the up, down,
left, and right direction.

Mark Manual

164
Max Tilt

Max Tilt defines the maximum amount that piece can be manually tilted in the
marker. After defining the angle (usually no more than 5 deg.), use the F11
and F12 keys to tilt a piece in the marker.
Locked Piece
If enabled, the pattern piece will not be placed when marker is auto-nested.
Material
The Material option defines the specific material group of which the
highlighted piece is included. If you would like the piece to be placed in a
different material group, you can change it here for this one marker.
Print Report
This command will print a summary report of the information defined in the
Piece Information dialog box. You can change the fonts using the Fonts option
in the Options Menu.
Best Quality
This option is used to define the quality of leather that this selected piece must
be cut from.
The attributes for each piece are displayed on the Size List as symbols or
letters. The symbols allow you to view the properties of each piece without
having to open the Piece Info dialog box.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

<+>

= 90 Rotation allowed (4 way)

<->

= 180 Rotation allowed (2 way)

<>

= No rotation (1 way)

<^>

= All Rotation allowed (anyway)

<=>

= Orientation: Both

<U>

= Up/Down Folding allowed

<S>

= Left/Right Folding allowed

<L>

= Locked piece for Automatic nesting

<B>

= Buffer is declared

<R>

= Remaining pieces after plies are calculated

<M>

= Mirror allowed

165

Mark Manual

166

All Sizes Info


Attributes for all sizes of a selected piece can be set in this dialog box.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

167

To Set All Sizes Info:

From the Piece Menu choose All Sizes Info.

Enter the desired values.

Click Apply next to each changed value.

Click Close.

The following attributes can be set in the All Size Info dialog box as well as
attributes described in the Piece Information Dialog Box.
Adjust description
Control the maximum text size of the piece description on the pattern pieces.
Optimize Internals Sequence
When this button is clicked, the software assigns the best cutting order for
internal elements on the pattern pieces.
Quantity
Amount of the pattern pieces to be placed on the marker can be changed in this
field.

Mark Manual

168

Global Info
The Global Info controls information settings for all sizes or specific sizes on
all pieces or specific pieces in the marker.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

169

To Set Global Info for all Sizes on All Pieces:

From the Piece Menu choose Global Info. The Global Pieces Info
dialog box is displayed.

Enter the desired values.

Click Apply after each changed value.

To Specify Settings for the Selected Size on Selected Pattern Pieces:

Hold down the Shift key and select the pieces in the Piece Display
Bar.

In the Global Info dialog box, check the Settings For Selected
Pieces Only and/or the Settings for Selected Sizes Only options.

Select the size for which you want to assign attributes.

Enter the attributes for that size. Click Set after each change.

Click Close to exits the Global Information dialog box.

The following attributes can be set in the Global Piece Info dialog box as well
as the attributes described in the All Size Information Dialog Box. Selected
pieces in the Piece Display Bar can be edited.
Settings for Selected Sizes Only
When this command is enabled, only the select sizes in the Piece Display Bar
can be edited.

Mark Manual

170
Weight Per Sq. Yard

Weight of the fabric can be entered in this field. Click Re-Calculate button to
update the values in the information box listed above.
Internal Text
Defines the size of the minimum and maximum internal text on pieces.
Set to Default
When checked, the defaults will be reset to use adjusted descriptions and
internal text sizes.

Delete
This command deletes the piece or size selected in the Piece Display Bar. All
nested pieces will be removed from the marker.

! Tip: To select multiple pieces in the marker, hold down the shift key and
select the pieces you wish to edit in the Piece Display Bar
Delete a Piece:

From the Piece Menu, select Delete.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

171

In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to delete all sizes of the
piece, click No to delete the selected size only.

The Piece will be removed from the Piece Display Bar and the marker.

Flip Vertical
The Flip Vertical command creates a mirror image of the selected piece. The
mirrored piece is added to the Piece Display Bar with the same piece attributes
as the original.
To Flip a pattern Vertically:

Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar.

From the Piece Menu choose Flip Vertical.

In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to mirror all sizes of the
piece, click No to mirror the selected size only.

A mirror image of the selected piece will be added to the end of the Piece
Display Bar. This option can be used to change the piece direction and to
create a new piece with an opposite direction.

Mark Manual

172

Flip Horizontal
The Flip Horizontal command creates a mirror image of the selected piece.
The mirrored piece is added to the Piece Display Bar with the same piece
attributes as the original.
To Flip a pattern Horizontally:

Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar.

From the Piece Menu choose Flip Horizontal.

In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to mirror all sizes of the
piece, click No to mirror the selected size only.

A mirror image of the selected piece will be added to the end of the Piece
Display Bar. This option can be used to change the piece direction and to
create a new piece with an opposite direction.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

173

Make Hole (Ctrl+H)


A hole is a shape within the marker that has smaller pieces inside of it. A hole
can be used for block fusing for nesting leather.
The Make Hole function allows the user to place small pattern pieces on an
odd shaped piece of fabric such as leather. The shape is placed in a box on the
marker.

Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar to make the hole.

From the Piece Menu, select Make Hole or Ctrl+H.

In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to Make Hole all sizes
of the piece, click No to Make Hole the selected size only.

! Note: One pattern piece for each size is created with a locked attribute for
auto nesting.

Mark Manual

174

Join Pieces
The Join Pieces function allows to similar pieces to be combined and be
treated as the same pattern piece in the Piece Display Bar.
Select the first pattern piece to be joined. Use the Ctrl key and select the
second piece. From the Piece Menu, select Join Pieces.

! Note: If the joined pieces match each other with only minor change, the
pieces will appear as the first selected piece.

Edit Piece
The Edit Piece command provides a special editing environment for last
minute changes to piece. These changes are only made to the selected piece
and over ride attributes defined in the Piece Info dialog box.

! Note: If you want all future markers to display these pattern changes, the
piece must be edited in OptiTex PDS.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

175

To Edit a Selected Piece:

Select the pattern piece in the Piece Display Bar.

From the Piece Menu, choose Edit Piece. The Piece Pattern Editor
dialog box is displayed.

Select the desired option(s).

Click Apply and Close.

Piece Pattern Editor Dialog Box:

Mark Manual

176
Original

Selecting Original will return the piece to its original state before any changes
were made in the Piece Pattern Editor dialog box.
Flip
To use the Flip option, check the Horizontal or Vertical fields at the bottom of
the dialog box and click Apply.

Add Point
The Add Point option adds a point to the piece buffer perimeter but does not
add a point to the original perimeter. Select the Add Point button, click where
the point is to be added, and click Apply.
Mirror
The Mirror option adds a piece to your marker that has been symmetric
duplicated. Select the Mirror button, click and drag on mirror line, and click
Apply.
Rotate
The rotate command allows a piece to be rotated. This change is only made to
the selected piece and over rides attributes defined in the Piece Info dialog
box.

! Note: There are many ways to rotate pieces in OptiMark. The 90/180 icon,
the Rotate icons, and rotating with the mouse follow the attributes that
have been defined in the Piece Info dialog box. The Edit Piece and
Rotate functions found in the Piece Menu allow the marker maker to
create separate attributes for a pattern piece.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

177

Delete Point
The Delete Point command is used to delete points added with the Add Point
command to the buffered perimeter of a piece. Select Delete Point, click the
point to delete and click Apply.
Cut
This command is used to split/cut/divide a single pattern piece either
horizontally or vertically.
To Cut a Piece:

From the Piece Pattern Editor dialog box, click the Cut button.

Enter a seam allowance value.

Select Horizontal or Vertical.

Click your mouse along the bottom edge of the graph on the right
side of the dialog box for horizontal cutting, or along the left side
for vertical.

! Note: Enable the Half option to split the piece in half. If you want to split
the piece a specific amount, disable the half box.

Drag the mouse to the desired location.

Select Apply.

! Note: When cutting a piece into two parts, two new pieces are displayed in
the Piece Display Bar with the same quantity as the original piece.

Mark Manual

178
Buffer

Buffer can be applied to a specific area of a piece and added to all the pieces in
a specified size. To add a buffer to only one piece in one size on the marker,
create a new piece by copying the old one and buffer it.

In the Piece Pattern Editor dialog box, select the Buffer option.

Enter a buffer value in the field.

Check Around, Up, Down, Special, Right or Left. When using


Special, click on a line between two points. The line will
highlight.

Click Apply.

! Note: The buffer will be executed only if it is possible to create one.


Move Point
The Move Point command is used to move points on the buffered perimeter of
a piece. Select the Move Point button, click and drag point to the new location
and click Apply.

Rotate
This command rotates a piece in the Piece Dialog Box or a piece nested within
the marker by a pre-determined angle. The base piece can not be rotated if
there is already a piece placed on the marker.

! Note: There are many ways to rotate pieces in OptiMark. The 90/180 icon,
the Rotate icons, and rotating with the mouse follow the attributes that
have been defined in the Piece Info dialog box. The Edit Piece and
Rotate functions found in the Piece Menu allow the marker maker to
create separate attributes for a pattern piece.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

To Rotate a Base Piece:

Select the piece in the Piece Display Bar.

From the Piece Menu, select Rotate. The Rotation by Angel


dialog box is displayed.

Select the desired option(s).

Click Close.

To Rotate a Piece within the Marker:

Select the piece in the Marker.

From the Piece Menu, select Rotate. The Rotation by Angle


dialog box is displayed.

Select the desired option(s).

Click Close.

! Tip: Group the pieces before selecting Rotate to rotate several pieces at
one time.

179

Mark Manual

180

Internals (Ctrl+E)
The Internals dialog box allows internal attributes in a pattern piece to be
changed for a selected piece and size. Attributes on each internal element
include size, direction, cut/plot order, etc. Call the Fax Back System to learn
how the options should be set for various NC Cutters.
Internals Dialog Box:

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

181

Internals
The type of internal being edited on the selected piece is highlighted. Internals
that can be edited include buttons, lines, arcs, circles, contours, dart points, or
pleats. Use the arrows in the dialog box to edit a different internal on the piece.
Notches
The type of notch you are currently editing is highlighted. Notches to edit
include T, I, L, V, U, or Box. Use the arrows in the dialog box to edit a
different internal on the piece.
Length, Depth, Radius, Perimeter
A new length, depth, radius, or perimeter can be defined for a selected
internal. Type the new value and click Apply.
Width, Arcs Length
A new width or arc length can be defined for the selected internal. Type the
new value and click Apply.
Mode
The Mode option allows the user to define which tool the numerically
controlled (NC) cutter will use to cut or draw the selected internal. The options
include Draw, Cut, Drill M43, Aux Drill M44, Punch M68, Quality, Sew, and
None.
Stripe Adjust Number
A Stripe Adjust Number on selected notches and buttons can be assigned.
Stripe Adjust Numbers are used for Stripe/Plaid markers. For more
information on the Stripe Adjust Numbers, refer to the Stripes and Relate
Piece to Stripes commands in the Marker menu.

Mark Manual

182
Operation Stop

The Operation Stop command defines the Op Stop for the selected internal: No
Stop, Before With Confirmation, or Stop.
Plotting / Cutting Time
The Plotting/ Cutting Time command defines the when the internals will be
cut on a pattern piece: Before the external contour, Together with the external
contour, or After the external contour.
Sequencing the Internals Cutting Order:
Show Numbers
The order in which each internal is cut will be displayed when this option is
enabled.
Set
This option changes the order in which the selected internal is cut.
Sort
The Sort function quickly reassigns the order in which each internal is cut.
Forward
The Forward function reassigns the cut order for each internal forward.
Arrows
The arrows move between internals that are being edited on a piece.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

183

Inverse
The Inverse function reverses the direction in which the selected internal will
be cut or drawn.

Delete
This option deletes the selected internal.
Apply
The Apply button must be clicked for the pattern edit to take place on screen.
Close
To exit the Internals dialog box, click Close.

Mark Manual

184

Internal Text
Select the internal text command in order to edit text to piece

To add an internal text:

Choose the internal command from the piece menu.

Click add to add a text

Enter you desire text in the Text Editor box.

Select the font size and the angle.

You can apply to all the size by checking the apply to all the
size box.

To remove a text: click on the desire text and click remove.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

185

Click O.K.

Holes and Internal Contours


The Holes and Internal Contours command is used to define whether pieces
can be nested within the internal cut outs of larger pieces, to change the cut
order of internal cutouts, or to change the cut direction of internal cutouts.
Holes and Contours Dialog Box:

Mark Manual

186
Under Current section
Change type

Use this option to change internals contour attribute from holes to contours or
from contours to holes. OptiMark software treat different internals with
hole attribute. If your internal contour attribute is hole, OptiMark automatic
nesting will place pieces in the hole if they fit.

! Note: If the internal contour attribute is hole, in case of cutting the internal
contour, cutter entry point will be inside the hole. This way you can
avoid the cutter knife to damage your fabric.
Delete
Use the Delete button to delete a selected contour.
Closed Contour
Use this option to close internal line to a close contour.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

Now you can change to internal contour attribute to hole.

187

Mark Manual

188
Cut Order

Use this option to open Cut Order Optimization dialog box for editing your
internal contour cut direction.

Current
Shows selected internal cutout. The Change button defines the selected cutout
as a Hole or a Contour. The Delete button deletes an internal cutout. The
Inverse button changes the cutting direction of an internal cutout.
Area/Perimeter
The area and perimeter of the selected internal cutout is displayed.
Global Set
The minimum and maximum size of holes and contours is set in this area.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

189

Sequence
The Arrows change the order in which internal cutouts will be cut. If checked,
show Numbers displays the order in which internal cutouts will be cut
Hole Level
The Hole Level command is used in the leather industry. When cutting leather
there are different zones, hole levels, with different qualities located one inside
another (pieces are nested on leather according to the area & quality). Use
Hole Level command when you have several holes located one inside another.
The level sequence goes from the biggest hole (the external hole) being level
one to smallest hole. (The number of levels is according to the number of
holes located one inside another).

Global Change Internals Parameters


The Global Change Internals Parameters dialog box allows the attributes of the
internal elements to be changed to at one time. Changes in type, size, and
whether internals are cut or drawn can be made to a currently selected piece,
all sizes of the current piece, or all pieces in the marker.

! Note: This command is very important after importing files that are created
for specific cutting machines or for exporting to a machine not
commonly used.

Mark Manual

190

Global Change Internals Dialog Box:

Pieces
Select All to apply changes to all the pieces in the file. Select All sizes of
current to apply changes to all the sizes of the current selected piece. Select
Current only to apply changes to the selected size of the piece.
Internal Types
The Type of Internals to edit includes notches, lines, arcs, buttons, circles, dart
points, or contours.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

191

Internal Sizes
Defines the size of the new internal element.
Current
The type of internal to be changed is selected on the left side of the dialog box.
New
The type of internal to replace selected internal is on the right side of the
dialog box.
All
All selected internals on all pieces and all sizes will be edited when this is
checked.

Place Selected Pieces


Place (Ctrl+P):
Use this command to place a selected piece or pieces on the marker area.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the pieces to place.

In the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place or


CTRL+P.

! Note: When you place the pieces with Place command, a pattern piece will
be placed on the marker even if the quantity in the Piece Display Bar
is 0. The software will not be able to place the pieces on the marker by
double clicking the mouse if the quantity in the Piece Display Bar is 0.

Mark Manual

192
Place One Set (Ctrl+Shift+P)

Use this command to place one set or bundle of the selected piece or pieces on
the marker area.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the pieces to place.

In the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place One
Set or CTRL+SHIFT+P.

Place All (Ctrl+Shift+Alt+P)


Use this command to place all of the selected pieces on the marker area.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the pieces to place.

In the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place All
or CTRL+SHIFT+ALT+P

Place Folded Left


This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the left
edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left can only be used on Faced or
Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the right/left.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the left
boundary of the marker.

From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place
Folded Left.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the left boundary of the marker by
placing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of the
marker boundary, holding down the L key, and double clicking the left
mouse button.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

193

Place Folded Right


This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the right
edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right can only be used on Faced
or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the right/left.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the right
boundary of the marker.

From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place
Folded Right.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the right boundary of the marker
by placing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of the
marker boundary, holding down the R key, and double clicking the left
mouse button.

! Note: Once the piece is placed, the bump tools can be used to move the
pieces around on the marker boundary. To unfold a piece, simply
return the piece to the Piece Display Bar.
Place Folded Up
This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the upper
edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Up can only be used on Tubular or
Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the upper
boundary of the marker.

From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place
Folded Up.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the upper edge of the marker by
placing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of the

Mark Manual

194

marker boundary, holding down the U key, and double clicking the
left mouse button.
Place Folded Down
This command is used to fold a piece in half and then place it along the lower
edge of the marker boundary. Place Folded Down can only be used on
Tubular or Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the
up/down.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold along the lower
boundary of the marker.

From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place
Folded Down.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the lower edge of the marker by
placing the cursor in the desired location on the left edge of the
marker boundary, holding down the D key, and double clicking the
left mouse button.
Place Folded Left-Up
This command is used to fold a piece into quarters and place it in the upper left
corner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left-Up can only be used on
Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down
and left/right.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters and
place in the upper left corner of the marker boundary.

From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place
Folded Left-Up.

Chapter 4: Piece Menu

195

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the upper left corner of the
marker boundary by holding down the Home key (located on the
numeric keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button.
Place Folded Left-Down
This command is used to fold a piece into quarters and place it in the lower left
corner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Left-Down can only be used on
Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down
and left/right.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters and
place in the lower left corner of the marker boundary.

From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place
Folded Left-Down.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the lower left corner of the marker
boundary by holding down the End key (located on the numeric
keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button.
Place Folded Right-Up
This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it into the upper
right corner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right-Up can only be used
on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the up/down
and left/right.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters and
place in the upper right corner of the marker boundary.

From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place
Folded Right-Up.

Mark Manual

196

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the upper right corner of the
marker boundary by holding down the Page Up key (located on the
numeric keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button.
Place Folded Right-Down
This command is used to fold a piece in quarters and place it into the lower
right corner of the marker boundary. Place Folded Right-Down can only be
used on Folded markers and on pieces defined with folding allowed on the
up/down and left/right.

In the Piece Display Bar, select the piece to fold into quarters and
place in the lower right corner of the marker boundary.

From the Piece Menu, select Place Selected Pieces. Select Place
Folded Right-Down.

! Note: The piece can also be placed along the lower right corner of the
marker boundary by holding down the Page Down key (located on
the numeric keypad) and double clicking the left mouse button.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

197

Chapter 5: Marker Menu


The Marker Menu contains commands related to the marker and nesting
functions. Use the Marker Menu to specify marker dimensions, clear a marker,
place pieces on the marker, remove pieces from the marker, and detect when
pieces are overlapping. The usual workflow of preparing a marker is as
follows:

Load a design (DSN) file by choosing the Open Design Files


command from the File menu.

Define the material type and order values for each size in the
Order for Marker Making dialog box.

Define the number of Plies by using the Optimum Calculations


command in the Marker menu.

Define the marker width and length and spreading method by


using the Marker Definitions command in the Marker menu.

Place the pieces into the marker area by nesting them


automatically or interactively. Pieces can be placed automatically
with the Start Auto Nest command in the Nesting menu. Pieces
can be placed interactively by using the various icons, commands,
and short cut keys.

Plot or cut the marker by using the Plot command in the File
menu.

Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M)


This function specifies options related to the current marker, such as, the
marker size, salvages and the fabric spreading method.

Mark Manual

198

To Apply Marker Definitions:

In the Marker Menu, select Marker Definitions. The Marker


Definitions dialog box is displayed.

Select the desired options.

Enter the desired information.

Click Ok.

Marker Definitions Dialog Box:

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

199

Dimensions
The size of the last marker is saved as the default size for the next marker. To
change the size, use the Choose Marker option or enter a new width and length
value.
Width
This field defines the width of the fabric.
Length
This field defines the length of the fabric. The length value is only a reference
value for the maximum length of your cutting table and can be changed at any
time. The waste and efficiency are calculated to the dashed efficiency line.
Number of Plies
Defines the number of plies for this maker. The optimum calculation
command in the marker menu might suggest changing the number of plies.
Layout Mode
There are four spreading methods that can be used to define a marker:
Singular, Tubular, Faced, and Folded. The spreading method will effect the
calculation of piece quantities placed on the marker.
Singular
Singular layout indicates that the fabric will be spread all face up or all face
down.
Tubular (UD)
Tubular layout indicates that the fabric is created in a tube. The pieces can be

Mark Manual

200

folded on the upper or lower edges of the marker. Tubular markers must have
at least 2 plies.
Faced (LR)
Faced layout indicates that the fabric must be spread face to face with folds on
the right and left side. Faced markers must have at least 2 plies. Pieces can be
folded on the right and left edges or the maker.
Folded (All)
Folded layout indicates that the fabric has been spread face to face with folded
edges on the right and left side. Pieces can be folded on the upper, lower, right,
and left edges of the marker. Folded markers must have at least 4 plies.
Total Pieces Area
This field calculates the total area of all the pieces in the marker and displays
the net area of material needed to place the pieces.
X Origin
The X Origin describes the waste area along the left edge of the marker.
X End
The X End describes the waste area along the right edge of the marker.
Y Origin
The Y Origin describes the waste area along the bottom of the marker.
Y End
The Y End describes the waste area along the top of the marker.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

201

Marker Area with Waste Limits


Waste Limits can be defined for any side of the marker area. This area of the
marker can be used as extra space to place pieces when creating a marker
interactively but will not be used when autonesting a marker.
Use Bump lines
Bump lines are used on the marker area as temporary boundary lines. Lines
can be placed manually with the cursor or set in the Marker Definition dialog
box. Bump lines are not shown when plotting.
Type of Material
Text entered in the Type of Material field is displayed in the marker header on
the plotter.

Marker List
The marker list display all the markers that save by the OptiMark software.

At the marker list you can change any of the marker parameters (width, length
and description) by double click on the desire field. One more click on the
Apply button will bring the marker's dimensions and name to fields in the
marker definition dialog box.

Mark Manual

202

Clear Marker (Ctrl+C)


This command clears and resets all pieces from the marker.
To Clear a Marker:

From the Marker Menu select Clear Marker or press CTRL+C. A


confirmation dialog box is displayed.

Click OK to clear the marker.

The dialog box will disappear, and the marker will be cleared. The size list and
the information line will be reset to its initial values.

Remove (DEL or CTRL+R)


This command clears only the selected piece(s) from the marker and sends
them back to the size list. The size list will be updated accordingly.
To Remove Pieces or Groups:

Select the desired piece(s) to remove from the marker.

! Tip: Press and hold the Shift key while clicking individual pieces to add
them to the group, or click and drag a box around the group of pieces
to remove. If only one piece is being removed from the marker area,
double click on the piece.

From the Marker Menu select Remove, double click on the


piece(s), alternatively press CTRL+R, or press DEL.

All selected pieces will be removed from the marker and will reappear in the
size list.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

Piece Parameters
The Piece Parameters box enables you to change parameters for a selected
piece:

Style Name
This field shows the style (design) name of your selected piece.

! Note: The design file name can be printed at the end of the marker, but it
cannot be printed on each piece in the marker.

203

Mark Manual

204
Size Name

This field shows the size name of your selected piece.


Piece Name
The Piece Name field shows the piece name of your selected piece if the
selected piece has a piece name.

! Note: The piece name is changed in the Info dialog box (Piece menu), but
cant be changed in the Piece Parameters dialog box.
Code
Code Name window shows the Code name of your selected piece. You will
see a code only if your selected piece have a code.

! Note: The piece code is changed in the Info dialog box (Piece menu), but
cant be changed in the Piece Parameters dialog box.
Description
The description window shows the description of your selected piece. You will
see a description only if your selected piece has a description.

! Note: The piece description is changed in the Info dialog box (Piece menu),
but cant be changed in the Piece Parameters dialog box.
Placement on marker
The Placement on Marker gives the location of a selected piece by
coordinates.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

205

In the X field moves left, center and right. The piece can move horizontally by
entering a new coordinate value to one of the three fields.
In the Y field moves top, center and bottom. The piece can move vertically by
entering a new coordinate value to one of the three fields.
Flip
If the Flip option is checked the piece will be flipped in the selected fashion. It
does not matter whether Mirror Allowed is enabled or disabled in Piece Info.

! Note: The piece is not flipped until the user clicks Ok.
Rotation
The rotation field assigns an angle for the piece to be flipped. Any other
attributes specified for the placed piece are disregarded.

! Note: The piece is not flipped until the user clicks Ok.
! Tip: There are many ways to rotate pieces in OptiMark: the 90/180 icon,
the Rotate icon and mouse methods of rotating read the options that
have been defined in the Piece Info dialog box. The Edit Pattern and
Rotate commands found in the Piece menu do not read the Piece Info.
No. Of Plies Reserved
The No. Of Plies Reserved to the Piece allows the user to control the ply
number on your selected piece.

Mark Manual

206

When changing the ply numbers for a specific piece use the No. Of Plies
Reserved command. When the number the number of plies change, the
number of pieces remaining in the Piece Display Bar will change.
The No. Of Plies Reserved To The Piece command, enables the user to plan
the spreading table in special cases, for example: a Vest that have three pieces:
one back and two fronts, the order for this specific vest will be: 50 S size and
50 L size. The number of plies on the spreading table is 100, but only 50 back
pieces are needed for each size.

! Note: If the No.Of Plies Reserved To The Piece command is not used, an
illegal piece intersection may result and the piece quantities will not
be updated according to the pieces that are locate on the working
area.

Selected each of the Back pieces.

From Marker Menu Select the Piece Parameters option. In the


No.Of Plies Reserved to The Piece window, enter 50 plies for

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

each of the Backs, now locate the S size on the L size.

! Note: If the number of spreading table plies is only one, the No. Of Plies
Reserved To The Piece window will be disable.
Legal Intersection
A check in this field allows selected pieces to intersect.

! Note: If there is an intersection between your selected piece and another


piece, the piece will be aligned.
Stop before cutting
A check in this field will stop before cutting the selected piece.
Dont cut the piece
Choose this option and the selected piece will not be cut.

207

Mark Manual

208

Copy Marker
The Copy Marker command copies the marker to the window clipboard. The
marker can then be pasted into other Windows applications.

Duplicate (Ctrl+D)
Select the Duplicate command to duplicate and place a selected piece(s) on the
marker. The duplicate pieces will be deducted from the size list box.
To Duplicate Piece(s):

Select the piece(s) to duplicate.

In the Marker Menu select Duplicate or press CTRL+D.

A duplicate of the selected piece(s) will be placed immediately above the


original. If there is insufficient room, it will be placed to the right and below
the original piece.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

Array
This function allows one or more pieces that are placed on the marker and
duplicated in columns and rows.
To Create an Array:

Select the piece(s) to duplicate.

From the Marker Menu select Array. The Array dialog box is
displayed.

Enter the desired values.

Click OK.

209

Mark Manual

210
Array Dialog Box:

Columns
Enter the number of columns to create. Columns are added to the right of the
selected Piece(s).
Row
Enter the number of rows to create. Rows are added above the selected
piece(s).
X Step
This option allows a distance to be set between the center of the first piece and
the center of the second piece in the X direction. If no step amount is defined,
the pieces will duplicate as close to on another as possible.
Y Step
This option allows a distance to be set between the center of the first piece and
the center of the second piece in the Y direction. If no step amount is defined,
the pieces will duplicate as close to on another as possible.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

211

Grid X
When this option is enabled, the pieces will duplicate in columns first
(horizontal direction). When this option is disabled, the pieces will duplicate in
rows first (vertical direction).
Enable Quality Overflow
Enable Quality Overflow allows OptiMark to complete the number of rows
and columns that are specified when not enough pieces exist in the size list
box.

Mark Manual

212

Alignment
The Alignment command is used to place pieces in relation to other placed
pieces on the marker.
Horizontal by Marker Center
This command is used to align pieces horizontally along the center of the
marker.

Group the pieces that should be aligned.

Select Alignment/Align Horizontal by Marker Center in the


Marker Menu or press Alt+Ctrl+M.

H
Horizontal by Upper Limit
This command is used to align pieces horizontally on the top of the marker.
The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece
closest to the markers upper boundary.

Group the pieces that should be aligned.

Select Alignment/Align Horizontal By Upper in the Marker Menu


or press Alt+up Arrow key.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

213

Horizontal by Lower Limit (Alt+Down)


This command is used to align pieces horizontally on the lower area of the
marker. The center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern
piece closest to the markers lower boundary.

Group the pieces that should be aligned.

Select Alignment/Align Horizontal By Lower in the Marker


Menu or press Alt+Down Arrow key.

Horizontal by Piece Center (Alt+Ctrl+H)


This command is used to place the selected pieces in the maker center. The
center of selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest
to the markers left boundary.

Select the pieces to be placed to the marker center.

Select Alignment/Align Horizontal Piece Center in the Marker


Menu or select Alt+Ctrl+H arrow key.

Vertical by Left Limit (Alt+Left)


This command is used to align pieces vertically on the marker. The center of
selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the left
boundary of the marker area.

Mark Manual

214

Group the pieces that should be aligned.

Select Alignment/Align Horizontal by Left in the Marker Menu or


press Alt+Left Arrow key.

Vertical by Right Limit (Alt+Right)


This command is used to align pieces vertically on the marker. The center of
selected pieces is aligned with the center of the pattern piece closest to the
right boundary of the marker area.

Group the pieces that should be aligned.

! Note: To Create a Group, click and drag a box around the desired pieces
on the marker, or press and hold the Shift key and click to add other
pieces to the group. A minimum of two pieces is required to create a
group.

Select Alignment/Align Horizontal By Right in the Marker menu


or press Alt+Right Arrow key.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

215

Vertical by Piece Center


This command is used to tell OptiMark that the marker center will now be the
alignment place. The four marker center commands refer to the Alignment at
Marker Center.

Make sure there are no pieces selected or highlighted in the


marker area or piece display bar.

Select Alignment/Align Vertical By Piece Center in the Marker


Menu or press Alt+Ctrl+V Arrow key.

! Note: To Create a Group, click and drag a box around the desired pieces
on the marker, or press and hold the Shift key and click to add other
pieces to the group. A group consists of two pieces minimum.

Replace Pieces on Marker


Pieces placed on the marker may be replaced with new pieces after the marker
has been created. For example, if a marker is complete the pocket piece on the
marker can be swapped with a different pocket piece (different style). The
pocket piece is pasted into the Marker and then the Replace Pieces on Marker
command is used to swap the old pocket piece for the newly loaded pocket
piece.

! Note: To paste a pattern piece from PDS into the Marker see Help for File
menu> Open Design File> Cut and Paste a Pattern Piece from PDS
into the Marker.
To Replace Pieces

Select the piece to replace from the Piece Display Bar. Hold down
the Shift key and select the new piece from the Piece Display Bar.

Mark Manual

216

From the Marker Menu select Replace pieces on Marker. The


Replace Pieces On Marker dialog box is displayed.

Optional: Enter the desired Incremental Rotation value or enable


the Mirror option.

Click OK.

Replace Pieces on Marker Dialog:

Incremental rotation
The replacement piece is rotated by the degrees entered in this field.
Do mirror
If checked, a mirror is created of the replacement piece.

! Note: Use Detect Intersections after using Replace Pieces on Marker


command from the Marker Menu to detect any overlapping pieces.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

217

Substitute
The Substitute command creates a new marker with the same placement layout
a previously created marker. For example, you can use the Substitute
command to make a new pant marker using size small instead of size large.
To Substitute using different sizes:

Open the marker file from which to take the piece layout of a new
marker.

From the Marker Menu select Substitute. The Substitute dialog


box is displayed.

Click Browse and select the design file that is currently placed in
the displayed marker.

The left side of Sizes Substitution display box displays the old
size and the right side displays the replacement size. To
substitute the replacement size, simply highlight the old size on
the left side of the screen and then highlight the desired
replacement size on right side of the screen.

Click OK.

To Substitute using different design files:

Open the marker file from which to take the piece layout of a new
marker.

From the Marker Menu select Substitute. The Substitute dialog


box is displayed.

Click Browse and select the design file that is currently placed in

Mark Manual

218

the displayed marker.

The left side of Sizes Substitution display box displays the old
size and the right side displays the replacement size. To
substitute the replacement size, simply highlight the old size on
the left side of the screen and then highlight the desired
replacement size on right side of the screen.

The left side of Pieces Substitution display box displays the old
piece names and the right side displays the replacement piece
names. To change the new replacement name, simply highlight
the old piece name on the left side of the screen and then highlight
the desired replacement piece name on the right side of the
screen.

Click OK.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

219

Substitute Dialog Box:

Cutting, Sewing, or Both


Determines the piece boundary/contour displayed and plotted in the marker.
Browse file to substitute
Defines the design file containing the new pieces.
Current Design File
Displays the design file in the current open marker file.

Mark Manual

220
Sizes Substitution

Defines the new size(s) that will replace the old size(s) in order to create a new
marker.
Pieces Substitution
Defines the new piece(s) that will replace the old piece(s) in order to create a
new marker.
Incremental Rotation
Defines a rotation of the pieces before substituting them.
Do Mirror
Allows the pieces to flip before rotating them.
Delete Unused
When Delete Unused is enabled, the pieces from the old marker will delete
from the Piece Display Bar.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

221

Detect Intersections
The Detect Intersection command checks the pieces for overlaps. All
overlapping pieces flash on screen and their colors change. The exact point of
the overlap (intersection) will be indicated by a flashing rectangle.
Overlapping pieces return to their initial color only after being moved to an
unrestricted location and Detect Intersections is executed a second time.

! Note: You can change the color of an overlapped piece by choosing the
Colors command in the Options Menu.

Check Current Solution


The Check Current Solution command checks the marker for complete
sets/bundles, non-complete sets/bundles or overlapped pieces.

Mark Manual

222

To Check a Current Solution

From the Marker Menu select Check Current Solution. The Check
Solution dialog box will display.

Enter the desired information.

Click Detect Intersections, Flash Sets or Flash Remainders.

Black flashing rectangles will indicate the intersections, sets or remainders. If


new pieces added or moved causes overlaps, the intersected pieces will blink
again.

! Note 1: Red dashed lines indicates overlapped pieces. In many cases, the
overlap is detected only by a fraction of a millimeter and the user
may choose to leave the nesting as it is. The same Check Solution
command also appears before any print is executed.

! Note 2: The color of each set/bundle can be changed using the Colors
command found in the Options menu.

! Note 3: The figure indicated in the size list box shows the number of pieces
left to be placed. When the figure in the size list box turns gray, all
pieces in the selected size have been placed. When the figure in the
size list box turns dark blue, extra pieces (remainders) were placed in
the marker.

Highlight Selected pieces


This new command helps you to find the selected piece on the marker. The
selected pieces would be displayed in different color then the other pieces
on the marker.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

223

Optimize Marker Cut/Plot Order


This command is used to define a portion of the marker to optimize for
numerically controlled (NC) cutting. It is not available until the cut order
numbers are displayed on the screen. Plotters can plot portions of pieces and
then advance the paper. Cutters must cut the entire piece and then advance the
fabric or paper.

! Note: The cut order numbers can be displayed by enabling Cut/Plot Order
in the Display menu, or clicking on the Show Cut/Plot icon.Cutter
Ordering Dialog Box:
Cutter Ordering Dialog Box:

Mark Manual

224

Shared lines
The Shared Line module is used for Plot, Cutting and other output capabilities.
It allows the software to automatically detect shared lines (Common lines)
between pieces on the marker. The recognition is made according to following
defined parameters: Minimum Length of shared line sections, Maximum
Distance of the shared lines and Maximum Angle between shared lines (the
maximum Angle to be recognized as the same line can be set).

! Note: If files are imported from another system, it is recommended to set


the attribute for the cutting direction and start point of the contour.
OptiTex Mark selects a Start Point according to the location of the
pieces. If a Start Point has been established, check the Do not
change option in the Cut/Plot Order Optimization dialog box.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

225

Use Frame, X and Y


When Use Frame is enabled, enter the X and Y maximum frame value of the
cutter. The cut order numbers will change to meet the frame values.
Optimization Limits
This option limits the pieces that are part of the defined frame size.
Start from Top of Marker
When this option is enabled, the cutter will cut the pieces at the top of the
marker before cutting the pieces at the bottom of the marker.
Choose Start Points
When this option is enabled, OptiMark will choose the optimum points for the
cutter to begin cutting each piece.
Choose Cutting Direction
When this option is enabled, OptiMark will choose whether to cut each piece
in the clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

! Note: The Plot or Cut Order can be changed interactively, simply click the
piece to cut or plot first. The piece chosen will change the cut order
on the marker and will become number one. Move to the piece to
cut/plotted next, click on it and continue this process for every point.

! Note: If you already created a cutting sequence for your marker and you
want change the sequence (you missed a piece), use Shift key
together with the mouse cursor to insert a piece into cutting sequence.

Mark Manual

226
Selected Piece Cut Order

Selected Piece Cut Order can be used to interactively define where the
numerically controlled (NC) cutter starts to cut the pieces and whether pieces
are cut clockwise or counter clockwise

! Note: The cut order numbers can be displayed by enabling Show Cut/Plot
Order in the Display menu.
To Optimize the Piece:

In the Marker Menu, click Select Piece Cut Order to display The
Cut Order Optimization dialog box. OptiMark will default to
cutting the entire piece in the clockwise direction.

Use the dialog box to change the start and end points, cutting
direction, tool, etc.

OPTIONAL: To make multiple traces, select Add, the second


trace will be added. Use the dialog box to change the start and
end points, cutting direction, tool, etc. Before adding the third
trace, make sure the trace that is to be split is displayed, then
select Add.

After all traces have been added and edited, click Ok.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

227

Cutting Order Optimization Dialog Box:

Sequence Number during Cutting


Displays the order in which the piece will be cut. Change the order by
changing the sequence number.
Set to All Same Pieces
When this option is enabled, all of the same pieces will have the same cutting

Mark Manual

228

attributes. When this option is disabled, only the cutting attributes on the
currently selected piece will be changed.
Current Trace
A piece can be cut in many different cut segments. For example, one curve on
the piece should be cut counterclockwise and the rest of the piece should be
cut in the clockwise direction. The Current Trace field displays the current
path that is being edited.
Starting Point
The arrow on the piece indicates the cutter start point for the current trace. The
arrows are used to change the start point. If Optimum is checked, the optimum
starting point is set by the software. If Default is checked, the start point will
default to the original position that was the first point digitized or the point
defined in PDS.
Ending Point
This field displays the ending point for the current trace.
Cutting Direction
If checked, the current trace will be cut in a clockwise direction. If unchecked,
the current trace will be cut in a counter-clockwise direction.
Tool
Indicates the tool to be used when cutting the current trace.
Enable Multiple Cutting of Segments
When enabled, one trace can be cut more than once, each time with a different
tool. This is very important when cutting metal.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

229

Optimum Calculations
OptiMark finds the right marker length and number of plies to create the most
efficient marker with the least waste. The initial calculations are based on the
total area needed or the total length of material required according to the
efficiency reached. These parameters and information are a basis for change.
After checking the results, decisions can be made regarding what width or
length of material to choose.
To Perform Optimum Calculations:

In the File Menu, select Open Design Files to load a DSN file.

Define the material type and order values for each size in the
Order for Marker Making dialog box.

In the Marker Menu, select Marker Definitions to define the


marker width, length and spreading method. The Marker Area and
Efficiency Evaluation dialog box is displayed.

! Note: It is recommended to place at least one set (two or more sizes are
recommended). This displays an indication of the real efficiency,
which can be achieved for the current job.

In the Marker Menu, select Optimum Calculations. Verify or


change the selected parameters.

Click Calc.

Click Close

Mark Manual

230

Marker Area and Efficiency Evaluation Dialog Box:

Area Usage
This field is used to enter the target efficiency percentage of the marker. For
example, enter 80 in the area usage window and then click Calc to the left of
Number of Plies. The value in the Number of Plies window will display the
number of plies necessary to place all the pieces in the defined marker width
and length. If the Area Usage and Number of Plies is entered, the length the
marker required to place all the pieces in the marker with the defined number
of plies and efficiency is displayed.
Estimated Total Area
The value listed in this field shows the total area of all the pieces in the marker
multiplied by the efficiency percentage entered.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

231

Estimated Total Length


This value is the estimated total area divided by the width of the marker.
Marker Length
The default value field is taken from the Marker Definitions dialog box in the
Marker Menu. The estimated total area, the number of plies, and the marker
width are used to determine the value.
Marker Width
This value is taken from Marker Definitions in the Marker menu.
Number of Plies
The default value in this field is taken from the number of plies defined in the
Marker Definitions dialog box. Click Calc to the left of Number of Plies to
calculate the needed number of plies. The value is determined by the marker
length, marker width, and estimated total area.
Plies Calculations
This command is used to calculate and find the optimum number of plies
needed for a cutting job. The number of plies will be calculated based on the
number of pieces. If the division is not exact, the letter R (for Remainders) is
listed in the Size List and Piece Info dialog box.

! Note: OptiMark calculates the optimum number of plies according to the


number of pieces, with minimum remainders.

Mark Manual

232

Weights
Selecting this option displays the Weights dialog box. Enter the weight of the
fabric. The box below displays the total area and weight of fabric needed for
all the pieces.

Bump/Cut lines
This command enables you to create multiple bump lines with draw and cut
attributes as well as a vertical overcut.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

233

To crate bump or cut line:

Point the cursor on the marker table borders

Clicks and drag line from the edges.

Place the lines on the marker table.

From the marker menu select BUMP/CUT lines command

In the Bump/Cut line dialog box you can edit the exact
coordinates of the lines and to change the attribute of them by
selecting the desire option.

Click apply. And then OK

! Note: cut or bump lines can be added from the dialog box by clicking on the
add button and entering the new line coordinates.
! Note: The cut bump line is used for cutting between the pieces and
marker borders. OptiTex marker will never cut a bump line on a
piece even if the bump line attribute is cut

Fabric Pattern
Use the Fabric Pattern command to create a bitmap image of the actual fabric
displayed in the marker area.

Mark Manual

234
Fabric Pattern Dialog Box:

View
This area defines how the bitmap will display in the marker area.
Disable
If checked, no bitmap is displayed.
Marker
If checked, the bitmap is only displayed on the marker area.
Selected Pieces Only
If checked, the bitmap is only displayed on the selected piece.
All Pieces On Marker
If checked, the bitmap is displayed on all the pieces in the marker.
Matching Fabrics Into Pieces
This command will display the chosen fabric instead of the piece color.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

235

Pattern Length (X Value)


This value represents the length of the repeated bitmap on the X dimension.
The bitmap will be scaled to fit in this length.
Pattern Height (Y Value)
This value represents the width of the repeated bitmap on the Y dimension.
The bitmap will be scaled to fit in this width.
Bitmap File
This field defines the bitmap file.

Load Fabric Dialog Box


The new dialog box Fabric Pattern provides the user with the ability to
connect fabric pattern (bitmap) to a specific material type.
To crate a material file:

Use Load Fabrics button from the initial fabric pattern dialog
box.

Mark Manual

236

Click on the Add button.

Enter the material type name or choose from the list of materials.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

237

Click OK

The new materiel will be added to the list in the fabric pattern dialog box.
To connect the new material type to a pattern (bitmap):

Click on the bitmap file filed, a small arrow will appear

Click on the arrow in order to select the desire fabric pattern.

Select the type of the graphic file (choose between: BMP, JPG,
PSD and more)

Click on the desired file, the preview of the pattern will show on
the dialog box.

Click OK

The material files save box will appear

Enter the file name in the Material Info File field.

Mark Manual

238

Click SAVE

To change the marker material type.

Open the piece info dialog box from the piece menu (you can use
Ctrl + I as shortcut).

Chose the new material type from the material field.

Click apply

The marker will apply the pattern connected to this material type

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

239

Stripe Definition
This command is used to define stripes, plaids, or floral prints on the marker,
simulating a repeated design. The Stripe Definition option is used when you
are marking material with a special design that must appear on the piece in a
specific place. It ensures that the piece will be cut correctly with the repeated
design.

! Note: The auto-nesting procedure does not take the Stripe Definition option
into account.
To Define Stripes:

In the Marker Menu, select Stripe Definition. The Stripes


Definitions dialog box is displayed.

! Tip: The Stripe Adjust option located in the Options Menu must be enabled.

Verify or change the selected parameters.

Mark Manual

240

Click Ok.

! Note: Select the Hide Stripes option in the Options Menu to display only a
fraction of the horizontal and vertical lines around the border of the
marker.
Stripes Definitions Dialog Box:

Start X
The Start X distance value defines the beginning of the first X stripe (plaid).
This is measured from the left edge of the marker.
Start Y
The Start Y distance value defines the beginning of the first Y stripe. This is
measured from the bottom line of the marker.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

241

Distance <F>
The distance between the vertical stripes (plaid lines).
Angle From Vertical (deg)
If an angle other than 90 degrees is needed, enter the desired value.
Distance <E>
The distance between the horizontal stripes.
Angle From Horizontal (deg)
If an angle other than 180 degrees is needed, enter the desired value.
A, B, C, D Measurements
These measurements could be use to define diagonal stripes instead of entering
values for angles.
Stripe Adjust According To Set Only
If unchecked, the next bundle placed will match in the same way that the
previous bundle of the same size matched. If checked, the next bundle placed
will not match the stripes unlike the previous one.
Revise Pieces Placements on Marker
Use this option to maintain pieces strips while you send your marker to
windows printer.

Mark Manual

242

To Add or Edit Stripe Adjust Notches or Buttons

Decide which pieces in your DSN file match.

Mark the match point on the pieces with notches or buttons.

The Notches and Buttons must be assigned Stripe Adjust


numbers. To ensure that all future markers receive the same stripe
adjust numbers, it is best to make the notch and button edits in
OptiGrade. If the attributes were not specified with OptiGrade,
you can use the Notch icon to edit the stripe adjust number in
OptiMark.

Numbers 1 through 4 can be used for stripe adjust numbers. The


match points that line up must be assigned the same stripe adjust
number and notch or button type. For example, if the side seams
of the front and back should line up, add the same type of notch
on both pieces in the matching location, and assign a stripe adjust
number of one. If the front has a patch pocket that lines up on the
right side, add a button to the front and to the pocket, and assign a
stripe adjust number of one or two.

! Note: Matching points can also be defined using the Fabric and Stripes
command in OptiGrade.

When the first piece is placed in the marker, the second piece will
look at the first piece to determine where it needs to be located.
All pieces placed on the marker which have the same notch
number will be placed at the same coordinates of each repeated
stripe as the first piece.

When stripe adjust according to sets is disabled, the next bundle


placed will match in the same way that the previous bundle of the
same size matched. When stripe adjust according to sets in

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

243

enabled, the next bundle placed will match any way that the user
requests. If stripe adjust according to sets in enabled and the first
bundle placed was Related to Stripes, the next bundle placed will
match in the same way that the previous bundle of the same size
matched.

You cannot have several like notches with the same stripe
numbers on the same piece. You can have different notches (V,
Us etc.) with the same stripe numbers on the same piece.

! Note: If you would like the stripe adjust point (notch or button) to match to
a particular stripe junction, follow the To Relate Pieces (With Stripe
Adjust Notches Or Buttons) To A Stripe instructions later in this
chapter

Relate Piece to Stripes (Shift+Home)


This function is used to lock a piece to a specific area on the fabric.

! Note: The auto-nesting procedure will not relate pieces to stripes.


Numbers 1 through 4 are used for stripe adjust numbers. The match points that
line up must be assigned the same stripe adjust number and notch or button
type. For example, if the side seams of the front and back should line up, add
the same type of notch on both pieces in the matching location and assign a
stripe adjust number of one. If the front has a patch pocket that lines up on the
right side, add a button to the front and to the pocket, and assign a stripe adjust
number of one or two. All pieces placed on the marker which have the same
notch number will be placed at the same coordinates of each repeated stripe as
the first piece.
There cannot be several like notches with the same stripe numbers on the same
piece, however, different notches (V, Us etc.) can appear with the same stripe
numbers on the same piece.

Mark Manual

244

To Relate Pieces (Without Stripe Adjust Notches or Buttons) To a Stripe:

Define the stripe distances using the Stripe Definition command


in the Marker Menu.

! Note: The distance is always measured from the selected point to the
closest stripe line down (Y distance) and to the left (X distance).
Select test to view the step amount before making the changes.

In the Options Menu, enable the Stripe Adjust option.

Place the pieces on the marker area.

When working with a piece that must be adjusted to a specific


stripe junction, place it in the correct location.

In the Marker Menu, select Relate Pieces To Stripes or press Shift


+ Home. The Relate Pieces to Stripes dialog box is displayed. A
point on the piece will be shown with a X. This X is the matching
point. To change the matching points use the arrows in the dialog
box and move the X around the piece.

Type the distance of the highlighted point from the X and Y


stripes.

Click Ok.

To Relate Pieces (With Stripe Adjust Notches Or Buttons) To a Stripe:


Place a notch or button with numbers from 1 to 4 at a specific distance to a
stripe junction. These values can be determined for either the X or Y
directions.

Define the stripe distances using the Stripe Definition option in


the Marker Menu.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

245

! Note: The distance is always from the selected point to the closest stripe
line down (Y distance) and to the left (X distance). Select test to view
the step amount before making the changes.

In the Options Menu select the Stripe Adjust option.

Place the first pieces on the marker area. All pieces placed on the
marker which have the same stripe adjust number will be placed
at the same coordinate as the first piece.

If the first piece placed should be located on a specific stripe line,


place the piece in the approximate desired location.

In the Marker Menu, Select Relate Pieces To Stripes or press


Shift +Home. The Relate Pieces to Stripes dialog box is
displayed. A point on the piece will be shown with a X. This X is
the matching point. To change the matching points use the arrows
in the dialog box and move the X around the piece.

Type the distance of the highlighted point from the X and Y


stripes.

Click Ok.

! Note: The distance is always from the selected notch or button to the closest
stripe line in X distance and in Y distance. The notch and button
numbers, which you see in the dialog box, refer to the available
notches.

Match ++
Match ++ is a completely automatic nesting system for matching pieces to
stripes and plaid fabrics. Match ++ is ideal for any product with matched

Mark Manual

246

fabric requirement. It is a powerful tool for working with striped and plaided
fabrics, railroad or flow matched fabrics.
Math ++ combines highly advanced mathematic algorithm together with
artificial intelligences methods.
The speed of Match ++ makes it beneficial for estimating pre-production
costing as wall as manual and automated production cutting.
Match ++ offers a quick and affordable way to save both time and money.
The match ++ will start automatically when starting automatic nesting and if
the stripe adjust option in the option menu is checked.
To run the match ++ module:

From the MARKER menu select the stripe definition command to


define the plaids and stripes on the marker.

From the OPTION menu check the STRIPE ADJUST Command


in order to display stripes on the marker.

From the NESTING menu click on the START AUTO-NEST


command.

The MATCH ++ dialog box will display. Enter in the maximum


nesting time in minutes.

Chapter 5: Marker Menu

247

Click OK.

The automatic nesting process will act according to the adjust commands
which assigned to the pieces.

Undo (Ctrl+Z)
The Undo command reverses the most recent changes. This command cancels
the last 20 operations step by step.

Redo (Ctrl+Y)
Use the Redo command to inverse the most recent action. This command
cancels the last 20 operations, one at a time.

248

Mark Manual

Chapter 6: Group Menu

249

Chapter 6: Group Menu


The Group Menu allows the user to treat several pattern pieces on the marker
as one unit. The pieces will move as a group until a different piece is selected.
All of the grouped pieces will move simultaneously by clicking inside one of
the grouped objects and dragging it to the desired location. Most commands
and tools that work on one piece will also work on a group of pattern pieces.

To Create a Group:

Click and drag a box around the selected pieces on the marker OR
press and hold the Shift key while clicking selected pieces to be
grouped. A minimum of two pieces is required to create a group.

! Note: Folded pieces in tubular markers cannot be part of a grouped section

Substitute size for selected pieces


Substitute sizes for selected pieces command enable the user to substitute
placed pieces size without nesting again pieces.
You can replace placed pieces size simply:

Select the piece/pieces on the piece display bar.

Go to group menu Substitute size for selected pieces command


(you can use F9 shortcut).

All the selected pieces will change their size to a bigger size on
you size list.

If your selected pieces size is already the biggest size in size list, the selected
pieces size will change to smallest size on you size list.

Mark Manual

250

! Note: Its recommended to run Renest command from nesting menu after
you replaced placed pieces size.

Keep
The Keep function groups selected pieces together. The grouped pieces will be
display with a dashed line around them on the Marker and will display as their
own piece on the Piece Display Bar. This group can be placed and
manipulated on the marker as if it were a single piece.

To Keep a Group:

Click and drag a box around the selected pieces on the marker OR
press and hold the Shift key while clicking selected pieces to be
grouped.

From the Grouping Menu, select Keep.

Chapter 6: Group Menu

251

! Note: After placing a kept group, the pieces will move as a group until a
different piece is selected or another group is placed.

Ungroup
The Ungroup function disables grouped pieces. Once the Ungroup command
is selected, the group will no longer be displayed in the Piece Display Bar and
the individual pieces will return to their original Piece Display Boxes.
To Ungroup Pieces:

Select the group to disable.

In the Grouping Menu, select Ungroup.

Fix on Marker
The Fix On Marker function permanently groups pattern pieces on the marker
until the group is disabled with one of the Unfix functions. When part of the
fixed group is selected, the whole group will highlight and move as a single
object.
To Fix a Group on the Marker

Click and drag a box around the selected pieces on the marker OR
press and hold the Shift key while clicking selected pieces to be
grouped.

In the Grouping Menu, select Fix On Marker.

Unfix Selected
All pieces that were in the selected group will be disabled and can be placed
individually on the marker.

Mark Manual

252

To Unfix a Selected Group on the Marker:

Select the group or groups to disable.

In the Grouping Menu, select Unfix Selected.

Unfix All
Select the Unfix All command to release the all fixed groups on a marker.

In the Grouping Menu, select Unfix All.

Stripe Adjust Group (Ctrl+G)


This command is used to ensure that if a piece is re-positioned within the
floral, stripe, or plaid marker area, the piece will match to the other placed
pieces.
To Create a Stripe Adjust Group

Position the pieces that relate to one another on the marker area.

Select the group of pieces.

In the Grouping Menu, select Stripe Adjust Group.

When a piece in the Stripe Adjust Group is moved, the piece will always snap
to a similar location.

Chapter 6: Group Menu

Rectangular Block Fuse (Ctrl+B)

The Block Fuse function creates separate Fusing (Cutting) zones.

Select the pattern piece or pieces from which to create a block


fuse.

In the Grouping Menu, select Block Fuse.

Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in the
block.

! Note: A folded piece can not be block fused.


When Plot is selected in the File Menu, the Block Fusing dialog box is
displayed.

253

Mark Manual

254

The All Nested Pieces function plots all the pieces with the
drawn blocks.

The Marker Without Blocks function plots the marker without


the blocks drawn.

The Marker With Block Spaces functions plots the marker


with block spaces.

The Contain All Blocks function plots only the contents of


the blocks.

The Contain of Selected Block function plots selected block


fuses.

Chapter 6: Group Menu

255

Thrifty Block Fuse


This feature enables the user to create a "thrifty" block fusing as opposed to a
rectangle block fusing; this limits fabric waste and the user can still create a
block fusing on selected pieces.

Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a thrifty
block fuse from.

Choose from Grouping menu Thrifty Fuse option.

Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in the
block.

! Note: Thrifty fuse will be disabled to a folded piece.

Optimum Block Fuse


This feature ables the user to create an "optimize" block fusing according to
the selected piece shape, allows for following the selected piece contours so
the user can decrease the fabric waste while creating a block fusing.
Click and drag a box around the area you want to create a block fuse from.
Choose from Grouping menu Optimum Block Fuse option.
Only pieces that were marked entirely in the box would be included in the
block

Select Whole Bundle


This command enables the user to select a complete bundle by selecting any
piece within the bundle

Mark Manual

256

Unify Pieces Orientation


This command enables the user to unify piece orientations within bundle
according to one selected piece orientation within the bundle.

Substitute One Bundle


This command allows the user to substitute one bundle with another bundle.
This is very useful in cases where a mistake has been made in one bundle.

Copy Size for Selected Pieces


This command allows the user to select several pieces and copy the size for all
of them at the same time.

``Chapter 7: Display Menu

257

Chapter 7: View Menu


Pieces on Marker
Select the Pieces on Marker command to determine the specific information
that is displayed on the screen and printed on output.
To Display Pieces on Marker:

In the Options Menu, select Pieces on Marker. The Display Pieces


on Marker dialog box is displayed.

Select the desired options.

Click OK.

! Note: If the box to the left of the option is checked, it will be displayed on
screen and printed on output. Click once to place a check and select
the option. Click again to remove the check.

Display Pieces on Marker Dialog Box:

Mark Manual

258
Pieces Tab:
Pieces
Original Contour

If checked, the original contour of the pattern piece is visible on the screen.
This option is used mainly on a buffered piece when only the buffered contour
should be displayed and printed.
Buffered Contour
If checked, the buffered contour of the pattern piece is visible on the screen.
This option is used on a buffered piece when the buffered contour should be
displayed and printed.

! Note: There are several ways to display a piece or pattern buffer. The
original piece can be displayed, the buffer only can be displayed, or
both the original piece and the buffer can be displayed together on
screen.

! Tip: See Edit Piece and Piece Info in the Piece Menu to learn how to add
and remove buffering.
Fill with Color (Ctrl+F)
If checked, a particular size will Fill With Color. Colors are set in the Options
Menu. If there are no color set, the default color will be used.
Colors According to Bundles
If checked, the pattern piece is displayed in color according to set or bundle.
When the Colors According to Sets command is unchecked, the piece color
will be displayed according to size. Colors are set in the Options Menu.

``Chapter 7: Display Menu

259

Text in Real Scale


If checked, the text and descriptions is displayed on the screen with the same
scale that the text will plot. When Text in Real Scale command is unchecked,
the text and descriptions will display on the screen so that it is readable.
Descriptions:
Style Name
If checked, the style name specified in the Order for Marker Making dialog
box is displayed on the screen and printed on output. The Order for Marker
Making dialog box is displayed when loading a Design file from the File
Menu.
Piece Name
Determines whether or not the piece names specified in the Piece Info dialog
box will be displayed on the piece with the output.
Piece Code
If checked, the Piece Codes specified in the Piece Info dialog box is displayed
on the screen and printed on output.
Piece Description
If checked, the Piece Description specified in the Piece Info dialog box is
displayed on the screen and printed on output.
Size Name
If checked, the Size Name is displayed on the screen and printed on output.

Mark Manual

260
Bundle Code

Determines whether or not this the set/bundle name displays on the piece with
output
Placements Info:
Tilt Angle
If checked the amount that each piece has been rotated or tilted is displayed on
the screen and printed on output.
Internals Tab Objects:
Notches
If checked, the notches are displayed on the screen and printed on output.
Points (Buttons)
If checked, drill holes are displayed on the screen and printed on output.
Buttons with Cut, Drill, or Aux. Drill attributes will plot as a circle
approximately 3/8 in diameter. Buttons with a Draw attribute will plot as a
circle with a cross hair in the center.
Notch and Point Numbers
If checked, the Stripe Adjust numbers are displayed on the screen and printed
on output.
Tools/ Layers
Determines whether or not the Tools or Layers will be displayed on the piece
with output

``Chapter 7: Display Menu

261

Internals By Tools:
Draw, Sew
All internals that will be drawn with the pen tool are displayed with a common
on the screen and printed on output.
Cut (punch)
All internals that will be cut with the cut tool are displayed with a common on
the screen and printed on output.
Drill (aux drill)
All buttons and notches that will be cut with the drill tool are displayed with a
common color on the screen and printed on output.
Quality
All internals that are defined with a Quality attribute are displayed with a
common color on the screen and printed on output.
None
All internals that are defined with a None attribute are displayed with a
common color on the screen and printed on output.
Internals:
Baseline
If checked, the baseline is displayed on the screen and printed on output.

Mark Manual

262

Contours, Lines, Arcs, Circles


If checked, the internal point lines, draft lines, and circles are displayed on the
screen and printed on output.
Pleats
If checked, the pleat and axis lines are displayed on the screen and printed on
output.
Darts
If checked, the dart points and dart apex are displayed on the screen and
printed on output. The dart in OptiMark is not displayed or printed as a fully
drawn dart.
Text
If checked, the internal text on a piece is displayed on the screen and printed
on output. This text can be helpful when including last minute instructions to
the operator. This does not effect the text found in the Descriptions section of
this dialog box.

``Chapter 7: Display Menu

263

Cut/Plot Order
The Cut/Plot Order displays the order in which the pattern pieces will be cut or
plotted. Double click the right mouse button on a blank area of the marker to
check and uncheck this option. The Cut/Plot Order can be changed using the
Optimize Cutting Order and Selected Piece Cutting Order commands in the
Marker menu.

Stripes Lines
If checked, the stripes on the marker are hidden. When this command is
activated, only a hint of the stripe around the edge of the marker is displayed.

Marker Full Length


If checked, the entire length of the marker is scaled to fit on the screen. If
unchecked, the width of the marker is scaled as wide as possible on the screen.
Right and left scroll bars are displayed to so the length of the marker can be
viewed.

Mark Manual

264

Zoom All Pieces on Marker


If checked, the marker area containing placed pieces will be scaled to fit on the
screen.

Piece Bar
Select this command to display the Piece Display Bar.

Size Lists
Select this command to display the Size List box. The size list box is located
below the Piece Display Bar.

<+> = 90 Rotation allowed (4 way)


<-> = 180 Rotation allowed (2 way)
<^> = All Rotation allowed (anyway)
<U> = Up/Down Folding allowed
<S> = Left/Right Folding allowed

``Chapter 7: Display Menu

265

<L> = Locked piece for Automatic nesting


<B> = Buffer is declared
<R> = Remaining pieces after plies calculations
<F> = Final Placement for Automatic nesting
<H> = Filling Holes as default for Automatic nesting
<M> = Mirror allowed

! Note: If there are more than five (5) sizes, use the up/down arrows to scroll
through the sizes.

Mark Manual

266

Spread Marker
Select this command to display Spread Marker. All the pieces are displayed along
the top of the marker with the quantity and size name.

! Note: If the piece quantity is zero, the piece will be without color (if there is
a color) and the piece contour will be dash line.

! Tip: You can also drag or use double click command to bring pieces that
are located on the spreading table to the working area.

Piece List
If checked, the Piece List dialog box is displayed. The first column of the
Piece List dialog box represents the piece number, the second column
represents the piece name, the third column is used for the size name, and the
fourth column represents the number or pieces still left to be placed. Use the
scroll bars to scroll up and down the dialog box. To place a piece from the
Piece List dialog box, double click on the piece name you would like to place.

``Chapter 7: Display Menu

267

Zoom View Window


The zoom view window helps you to specify the zoom spot. The zoom view
window displays the full length marker and on the marker itself you will see
the zoom area.
Use the hand cursor to drew the zoom rectangle

Tool Bars
If checked a list of Toolbars is displayed allowing the user to manipulate
which Toolbars are displayed. In the toolbar dialog box, the user can choose
between large or small buttons (icons), ToolTips enabled or disabled, and the
conventional appearance or the new cool look.

Mark Manual

268

New Toolbar
OptiMark gives you the option to create toolbars and customize them to yours
needs.
To create and customize toolbar give the toolbar name and click o.k.

``Chapter 7: Display Menu

269

Customize
OptiMark gives you the option to create toolbars and customize hem to yours
needs.
You can customize an original or new toolbar:

Reset
Click on this button to reset the highlight toolbar name. The toolbar will back
to the original form.

Mark Manual

270

View the Status Bar


This command will display or hide the Status Bar line (in the marker bottom).

! Tip: to edit the information on the status bar select the Preference dialog
box in the Option menu.

Chapter 8: Options Menu

271

Chapter 8: Options Menu


The Options menu allows the user to set up the screen according to their
preference.

Stripe Adjust
This command acts as an on/off toggle switch when working with Stripe,
Plaid, and floral material. When activated, all same-type pieces will be
adjusted to match the relative stripe coordinates of the first piece placed on the
marker. The matching point for the pieces are determined by using notches or
buttons with stripe adjust numbers from 1 to 4 or by using the Stripe Adjust
Group (see Marker Menu for Stripe Definition and Relate Pieces to Stripes
commands and Group menu for Stripe Adjust Group).

! Note: If several pieces in a style have the same stripe adjust number, all
pieces will be adjusted to the same relative position.

Single Piece Gap


This command acts as an on/off toggle switch when working with a predefined
Single Gap. To define a Single Gap, select Preferences in the Options Menu
and enter a value in the Single Gap field.

272

Mark Manual

Single gap enables temporary Gap (Buffer) around a single piece during
manual mouse: Slide or Shooting. The Gap is created during the Shoot
function and will stay with the piece. For permanent Gap, use the Gap function
in the Preference dialog box. The Gap value is defined in the Marker menu
at the preferences dialog box. To enable or disable the function use the
command Single Piece Gap from the Option menu.

Chapter 8: Options Menu

273

Limit Rotation
This command acts as an on/off toggle switch for using the rotation and
flipping limits defined in the Piece Info, All Sizes Info and the Global Piece
Info dialog boxes. If unchecked, the pieces act as if no rotation limits have
been defined.

Round After Rotation


The Round After Rotation command acts as an on/off toggle switch to control
the manual rotation value of a piece when rotating with the mouse. When the
command is activated, the piece will jump to the nearest 90-degree angle
(within a range of 8 degrees from the initial position).

Mark Manual

274

Colors
This option specifies different colors for the OptiMark elements.
To Choose General and Size Colors:

In the Options Menu, select Colors. The Color Selection dialog box
is displayed.

Select the Object Type you want to change General, Sizes, or


Bundles.

Chapter 8: Options Menu

Select an item to change the color. The item name is displayed in


the Object Name field.

Select a color from the color palette displayed in the dialog box.

Click OK.

275

Many colors can be changed before exiting this dialog box. In your OptiMark
or Windows directory, there is a file called OPTIMARK.CLR. This file
contains the color definitions for OptiMark and OptiGrade.
To Define Bundle Names and Colors:

In the Options Menu select Colors. The Color Selection dialog box
is displayed.

Select Sizes and select the size to define bundles for.

Select Bundles and in the Object Name field type the name of the
first bundle.

Select ADD.

Select the color of your choice for the first bundle.

Repeat steps 3 through 5 adding each bundle for the selected size.

Repeat steps 2 through 6 to define bundles for each size.

Select OK.

Mark Manual

276

Fonts
The Choose Fonts dialog box allows the user to customize the program to suit
their particular needs. Once a new font is selected the piece text or general
selections will be updated immediately.
Marker fonts prefer (TT) True Type fonts. It is important to have the correct
fonts and printer driver for your printer so that the correct font size and format
print. For some printers it is crucial to install the original printer driver and not
a substitute. While regular printer fonts are specific and supplied by Windows,
the output font to the plotter is a vector text, which is supported by OptiMark.

! Note: This command uses the fonts found in your Windows directory.
The font type can be changed in the OptiMark or OptiGrade section of the
OPTIKAD.INI and saved to the file in the same directory. The different font
styles appear in the OPTIKAD.INI file. It is possible to edit this file with a text
editor like Windows Notepad, which creates an ASCII file.
Text output to the plotter or printer can be different from the text, which is
displayed on the screen. Plotter fonts are available in different languages by
using the appropriate PLOTTER.FNT file. For complete output support in all
text options and languages, use the PLOTTER.FNT file.

! Note: OptiMark supports text rotation, but not mirrored text, because
Windows does not support mirrored text.

! Note: Mirrored text is supported on the plotter with our own fonts, or by
plotters which have a built-in mirror fonts option. The plot file is
sent to the plotter with this option.

Chapter 8: Options Menu

To Select or Change a Font:

In the Options menu, select Fonts. The Choose Fonts dialog box
is displayed.

Select the type of font you want to change. The respective Font
dialog box will be displayed.

Select the desired font style and size.

Click Apply. Click OK to exit the Font dialogs box.

Click Close in the Choose Fonts dialog box.

Choose Fonts Dialog Box:

277

Mark Manual

278

Restore Default changes all displayed font types, styles, and sizes to the
factory settings.

! Note: In your OptiMark or Windows directory, you should have a file


called WIN.INI. This file contains the font definitions for OptiMark
and OptiGrade.

Working Units
Working Units specify whether measurement type will be used in the software.
The types include millimeters, centimeters, meters, inches, feet, or yards. The
default working units appear in the OPTIKAD.INI file. While using Import or
Export of Cad Cam files different working unit can be defined, but the change
will be applicable only for the Import and Export options.

Chapter 8: Options Menu

279

Preferences
This dialog box is used to define Options related to OptiMark.
Status Line Tab:
The information to be displayed in the status line at the bottom of the screen.
Check each element to display in the status line and uncheck to exclude.

Mark Manual

280
Options Tab:

Check Style files before Opening


If this option is checked OptiMark will compare the date of the most recent
design file to the date of the design file used to make the existing marker file
before opening an existing marker file. If the dates are different a dialog box
will display.
Use the first piece name as Style file name
Use this command when the style file is without a name. The software will be
using the first piece names as style file name.

! Note: If unchecked, style files without names will be stay without names.
Merge Marker Vertically
If checked, markers will be merged side by side (default) or one over the other.

Chapter 8: Options Menu

281

Multi Line Piece Description


Check this box to enable piece description to be more then one line
Bubble Info
The bubble info can used to give a description of pieces with no need to open
the attribute box. The bubble info pops up when the mouse courser points on
the elements. Check this box to enable the bubble info.
Auto Extract from Intersections
Use this option to avoid intersection while nesting manually. In case of
intersection the nested piece will jump from placed piece.
Notch Depth
Sets the default Notch Depth for all notches that are added using the Notch
tool in OptiMark.
Notch Width
Sets the default Notch Width for all notches that are added using the Notch
tool in OptiMark.
Button Size
Sets the default Button Size for all buttons on the pattern pieces.
Text Size
Sets the default Text Size for all text added using the Text tool in OptiMark.

Mark Manual

282
General Tab:

Auto Save Interval


Define the time interval for the automatic save for your files. The AutoSave
option saves only the file that is currently open. It creates a backup titled
BACKUP.DSP.
The BACKUP.DSP file can be opened through the Open Marker File dialog
box. This file can be opened if you forget to save a file before shutting the
system down or if the system is shut down incorrectly. After loading the
backup and inspecting its contents you can save it again under the original file
name.
The directory in which your BACKUP.DSP file is saved is determined in your
OPTIKAD.INI file. When installing the program for the first time, you will be
asked where you want to place your \TEXWORK\EXAMPLES directory. This
is where your BACKUP.DSP will be located.

Chapter 8: Options Menu

283

The AutoSave command is not intended to make backup copies of your files.
It is designed to create a single backup copy of the file you are currently
working on if your system crashes or is improperly shut down.
Move step by cursor key
Define the jump step value for moving a piece on the marker by the keyboard
cursor.
Tilt Step
Use this area to define the amount a piece should be rotated each F11 and F12
is selected. To define the maximum amount that a single piece can be tilted,
refer to the Piece Info dialog box.
Block Buffer Size
This command is used to define your Block buffer size when you use the
Block Fuse command in the Grouping menu.
The Block Fuse command is used to define the cutting area around selected
pieces. To define the Block buffer size around your selected pieces (the frame
around the pieces), go to the Preferences dialog (in the option menu) to Block
buffer size and fill in the desirable size to the Block buffer.
Adjust Gap
Sets a constant default gap between pieces when the Adjust, Adjust Rotate,
and Insert to Hole tools are used in the marker area.
Single Piece Gap
Sets the gap between pieces when the Adjust, Adjust Rotate, and Insert to
Hole tools are used in the marker area. The Single Piece Gap must be checked
in the Options Menu for this function to be applied on the marker.

284

Log File Tab:

Mark Manual

Chapter 8: Options Menu

285

Log File
This option writes Marker information to a log file that contains information
about the marker, number of pieces placed, and material usage. The log file
can then be used for tracking what was plotted. To view the log file, use a text
editor or select Solutions Reports from the Nesting menu.
Click on the Browse button to locate where the log file will be saved.

Mark Manual

286

Post Saving Action /Export to ASCII Application


The program Exp2asci.exe is a small application that will enable the user to
read the header information of OptiTex DSN and DSP files. The Exp2asci will
convert the header information to an ASCII format, which will enable it to be
read by electronic spreadsheet (Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, Quattro etc.). The program
works in Win95 environment and can be run from DOS prompt and from
Windows Run or Explore. By changing the Properties parameter you can run
this program every time you send a file. The main screen looks like this:

The user should fill two fields (if they are empty) and press Start. The program
keeps the name of your previous output file and uses it next time by default. It
uses the name of current DSP or DSN file. The program reads the input file
and appends the information to the output file. It is possible to convert many
files in one session. In order to end a work session press End. The program
will not start if one of two fields is empty.
Error messages:

Chapter 8: Options Menu

287

Please check that the input file does exist and full path is correct.

The file exists but it is currently used by another application. The Exp2asci
program cant work with it. Please close the file or select other name for
output file.
To Disable the Post Saving Action uncheck Run this Application after Save

AutoSave (Backup) file


Locate the place in your hard drive to save the backup file by clicking on the
browse button.

288

Mark Manual

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

289

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu


The Nesting menu includes commands for automatic nesting solutions.

Stop
When the automatic process begins, a clock icon will be displayed indicating
that automatic placement is in process. To stop the Auto-nesting procedure,
choose Stop from the Nesting menu. The Nesting process will be halted and
only those pieces already nested will stay on the marker.
The Auto-nesting procedure stops only after the current piece is placed on the
marker. In cases where the current piece is complicated, or the solution task is
very large, it may take some time to stop the Auto-nesting procedure. Once the
Auto-nesting procedure has been halted the user may change the Piece
Attributes, move the nested pieces and place new pieces. The new attributes
will be taken into account when the Auto-nesting procedure is resumed. Select
Continue from the Nesting menu to resume the nesting in progress.
To Stop Auto-nesting:

In the Nesting Menu, select Stop.

Continue
This command enables the user to place some pieces on the marker and let
OptiMark place the rest of the pieces. Select the Continue command to
resume the automatic nesting procedure after auto nesting has been stopped.
To Continue Nesting:

In the Nesting Menu, select Continue.

Mark Manual

290

! Note: OptiMark will continue nesting pieces. If the Fill Holes option is
enabled, OptiMark will check the previously placed pieces and fill
all necessary holes before continuing.

! Tip: Ctrl+Alt+S continues the nesting process without filling holes.

Start AutoNesting
This command starts the automatic nesting procedure.

! Note: This option requires an empty marker. If there are pieces already on
the marker you will be asked to clear it.
To Start Auto-Nest:

In the Nesting Menu, select Start AutoNesting.

The marker will begin filling with pieces and will continue until all pieces in
the file have been placed. To stop the Auto-nesting in process, select Stop
from the Nesting Menu. Refer to the explanation earlier in this chapter for
more information on stopping the Auto-nesting in process.

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

291

Auto Nest Selected Pieces


To activate this command, at least two sizes and/or pieces must be selected in
the Piece Display Bar. Only the pieces and sizes selected will be autonested.

! Note: To select multiple pieces and/or sizes in the Piece Display Bar, hold
down the shift key and select each piece and/or size in the Piece
Display Bar.

Auto Nesting To Separate Block


This feature provides the ability to nest pieces from the same sets/bundles in
separate blocks and dividing the marker table to separate stripes according to
piece's sets/bundles.

Renest Pieces on marker


This option is available only with Nest++ module. Use Renest Pieces on
marker option to nest with Nest++ pieces that already are placed on the
working area.

Compact Arrangement
Allows to for the most compact arrangement of pieces on the Marker.

Mark Manual

292

Click Ctrl+J to get better nesting result after the automating nesting had
finished.

Duplicate Marker
Select the Duplicate Marker command to duplicate all currently placed pieces.
With this command, the duplication will be made up to the marker limit,
which is defined in the Marker Definitions command in the Marker menu.
The Duplicate Marker command may create a situation where there are not
enough pieces to fill the entire marker. In this case the number of pieces will
be increased and appear as a negative (-) number, you will have remainders
cut.

Auto Nesting Setup


The AutoNest Setup enables the user to select one way of the nesting option
from several options. It is also possible to create a list of markers to nest and
compare the results with different material width. A comparison table will be
created for verification purposes.

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

293

Standard
Auto nesting produces better marker efficiencies by allowing the system the
time needed to create a good nest.
Nest++
Is an optional add-on application to OptiMark with fantastic result. The
efficiency is based on the duration that the automatic algorithm will run. The
average time needed to get a good nest should last about 15 minutes for a
marker with 50 to 80 pieces. A good nesting can be reached also after 2 or 3
minutes.
Quick
The Quick command enables OptiMark to nest the pieces as quickly as
possible. OptiMark will not spend a lot of time trying to find the best possible
efficiency.
Nesting According to Bundles
While the Nesting According to Sets command is enabled, OptiMark will nest
the pieces by sets/bundles and sizes. OptiMark will mix pieces from different
sets, but will do its best to complete one set first before moving to the next set.
When this command is disabled, OptiMark will place pieces according to the
square area of the piece, placing larger pieces first.
Unify Orientation Within Bundles
This feature enables you to unify piece orientation within bundles or set in
order to create a complete bundle/set with the same orientation while using
Nest ++.

Mark Manual

294

Unlimited Marker Length


The Nest++ will ignore the marker length as it display in the marker
definitions. Check this box to assure that all the pieces will fit in to the marker.
" Nest ++ "will find the best nesting solution and the shorter marker.

Auto Save of Markers


Enabling the Auto Save of Markers command will divide one order into
several markers when necessary. Reasons to use this feature include: when the
fabric can only be spread so long due to shading, lack of spreading tables, or
the fabric is sold in sheets.
If the autonesting marker becomes full (no additional pieces can be placed
within the marker limits) then a second marker will be created. The marker
limit is defined in the Marker Definitions command in the Marker Menu. The
new marker will be given a name that is similar to the initial file name, but the
last two letters will be changed to a dash (-) and a number.
For example, if the original file is titled MARKER.DSP, all overflow files will
be given the name(s) MARKER-1.DSP, MARKER-2.DSP and so on.
There are two options with the Auto Save of Markers command.

Save the placed (full) marker with all the unplaced pieces listed in
the Piece Display Bar. The next marker will also list the previously
placed pieces in the Piece Display Bar.

Save the placed (full) marker with zero remainders listed in the
Piece Display Bar. The next marker will list only the unplaced
pieces in the Piece Display Bar.

! Note: The same option exists in the File menu with the Save Current
Nesting command.

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

295

To Enable Auto Save of Markers

In the Nesting Menu, select Auto Save of Markers. The Save


Current Nesting dialog is displayed.

Enter the file name.

Click OK.

! Tip: If the original marker was saved with zero remainders, the original
remainders can be updated. Select Open Design Files from the File
menu, double click on each of the Design files listed and select OK.
Save Current Nesting Dialog Box:

Browse
Click on the Browse button to specify a name for the original DSP (marker)
file. The additional DSP files will have the same name followed by a hyphen
and a number.

Mark Manual

296

Write Reports to File


Enabling this option will allow the marker information to be reported to the
log file each time a marker is saved or plotted. Click on Change Log to
specify a name for the ASCII log file.
Create NST-file (cncKad) too
NST is one of the file formats that are used in the cncKad system. By
enabling this command, a NST file will automatically be created each time the
DSP file is saved.

Save only nested parts (and zero remainders)


When this command is enabled, the original marker will be saved with zero
remainders, only the new marker will have the unplaced pieces listed in the
Piece Display Bar.

Compact Arrangement (Ctrl J)


Allows to for the most compact arrangement of pieces on the Marker.

Duplicate Marker
Select the Duplicate Marker command to duplicate all currently placed pieces.
With this command, the duplication will be made up to the marker limit,
which is defined in the Marker Definitions command in the Marker menu.
The Duplicate Marker command may create a situation where there are not
enough pieces in the Piece Display Bar to fill the entire marker. In this case the
number of pieces will be increased allowing remainders to be cut and a
negative (-) number will be placed in the Piece Display Bar.

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

297

Solutions Reports
Select the Solutions Reports command to view and/or print a report. The
information in this *.LOG file includes details of the saved markers. One LOG
file can include reports for many different files.
The LOG file is an ASCII file, where each piece of information appears with a
specific key letter allowing you to send the information to other applications.
The LOG file can be defined in the Save Current nesting command in the File
Menu or the Auto Save of Markers in the Nesting Menu.

! Note: To create a log file checks first the Write reports to file box in
Preferences dialog box under the Options Menu.
To View and Print the Log File:

Select Solutions Reports from the Nesting Menu.

Use the Browse button to ensure that the correct log file is
displayed.

Mark Manual

298
Solutions Reports Dialog Box

This dialog box displays the date, length, width, number of plies, efficiency,
and spreading layout for each saved marker. The most recently saved marker
will be displayed at the top of the list.
Total
The total button is used to view an average efficiency and total number of plies
for a selected group of saved markers. Hold down the shift key to select the
markers you would like to average and select the total button.

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

299

Print
The Print button is used to generate a printed report of the displayed log file.
Details
Select one marker from the log file listed and click Details. The solutions
report details dialog box for the selected marker is displayed.
Solutions Report Details Dialog Box

Selected Design File


A drop down box is displayed listing all the design files in the current marker.
Detailed information about the selected design file is displayed in the boxes
below.

Mark Manual

300
Top Box

This field displays the total area and perimeter for all pieces in each size.
Bottom Box
This area displays the total area and perimeter for each piece and size.
Print All
Print All will print a report for each design file contained in the selected
marker file.
This option is enable only when two or more markers were merged (File
Menu, select Merge Several Markers option.)
In the Solution Report dialog box:

Select the last file from the Solution File Name list.

Click on the Details button.

Click on the Print All buttons.

Print
Print will print a report of the selected design file contained in the selected
marker file.

Start Batch
Rather than use the menus, a batch files can be created to request markers,
auto- nest, import files, export files, and plot files. A Batch holds a series of
commands, each of which are divided, into three sections: the command, a
message attached to the command, and a value. The use of the Batch

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

301

Command files enables a set of commands to be executed by OptiMark


without an operator at the computer.

To Start a Batch:

In the Nesting menu select Start Batch. The Batch dialog box is
displayed.

Enter the File Name or select Browse to find the desired file.

! Note: It is recommended that OptiMark Batch Command files be created


with a .BTF extension. Message-files have a .MSG extension.

Enter the message to accompany the file or select Browse to find the
desired message.

Select or enter the desired information and click OK.

Click OK to exit the Batch dialogs box.

! Tip: Select Import setup to display the Import setup dialog box.

Mark Manual

302

To Create a Batch Command File:


A Batch can hold a series of commands, each of which is divided, into three
sections: the command, a message attached to the command, and a value.
Listed below is a list of the various Batch commands.
@<Command> [[/]<Keyword>=<Value>] ... [; <Commentary>]
or ;<Commentary>
Batch Commands:
@! or @EOF

End of Batch-file performing.

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

@PAU[SE]

Stop of Batch process. Use menu to continue.

[/MSG=<message text>] Must not content , and > symbols.


@SET

Sets value to OPTICAD.INI - file.

/SEC[TION]=<Section name>/KEY[WORD]=<Keyword>
/VAL[UE]=<Value>
@UNI[T]

Set working units.

/CM | /MM | ME[TER] | /IN[CH] | /FE[ET] | /YA[RD]


@NEW

Delete all patterns and clear marker.

[/NA[ME]=<title>]
@OPE[N]

Opens (or merges) marker file.

/FI[LE]=<file-name>[/ME[RGE]]
@SAV[E]

Saves results in marker file.

[/FI[LE]=<file-name>] File-name is selected or generated


[/LO[G]={NO | YES}] Use Log-file
@DES[IGN]

Open DSN-file.

/FI[LE]=<file-name>
[/SE[AM]={C[UT] | S[EW] | B[OTH]}]
[/OR[DER]=<Order number>]

303

Mark Manual

304
[/MA[TERIAL]=<Material>]
[/SI[ZE]=<size-name>

[/QU[ANTITY]=<No.of sets of the size>]


@IMP[ORT]

Import one file.

/FI[LE]=<file-name>
/FO[RMAT]=<file-format>DXF, AAMA, IGES, CADL(CadKey),
DFT(cncKad), GERB(Gerber Cutter), HPGL
[/UN[IT]=<Units>] CM, MM, ME[TER], IN[CH], FE[ET], YA[RD]
[/CL[EAR]={NO | YES}]

Clears marker before import.

[/SI[ZES]={NO | YES}]

Use Sizes (as button in Import dialog)

[/DS[N]={NO | YES}]

Saves Design file

[/GB[UF]=<Buffer size>]

Sets buffer size

[/GD[IR]=<Rotation allows>]
1(None), 2(PI), 4(PI/2), 0(All enable)
[/GM[IR]=<mirror allows>]

0, 1(Allow)

[/QU[ANTITY]=<Quantity>]
[/MA[TERIAL]=<Material>]
@EXP[ORT]
/FI[LE]=<file-name>

Export.

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

/FO[RMAT]=<file-format>

305

DXF, AAMA, CADL, IGES

[/X[SC]=<X-scale>]
[/Y[SC]=<Y-scale>]
/NS[PLINE]={NO | YES}}]Using splines and polylines
[/SP[ST]=<spline step>]

Step for spline line export (only if /NS=YES)

[/NA[RC]={NO | YES}]

Using arcs

[/ARCN[UM]=<Lines>]

Max no.of lines for arc (only if /NARC=YES)

[/ARCB[ULGE]=<bulge>]

Bulge for arc lines (only if /NARC=YES)

@PLO[TTER]

Plotting to file.

/FI[LE]=<file-name>
/FO[RMAT]=<file-format>DMPL, CYBCUT(Cybrid Cutter/Plotter),
CYB(Cybrid Plotter), IOLS, HPGL, HP2(HPGL/2), HPTEC(HPGL PlotTec),
HPGEN(HPGL Generic),WILD(Wild Cutter/Plotter), WLDPL(Wild
Plotter),APGL(Gerber Plotter), MICRO(MicroJet Plotter),GERB(Gerber
Cutter), CEDGE(Cutting Edge), EAST(Eastman Cutter)
[/X[SC]=<X-scale>]
[/Y[SC]=<Y-scale>]
[/SC[ALE]=<type>]
[/PGX=<Page size X>]
[/PGY=<Page size Y>]

SPG(single page), MPG(multi page), FSC(fixed scale)

Mark Manual

306
[/SP[ST]=<spline step>]

Step for spline line plotting

[/ARCB[ULGE]=<bulge>]

Bulge for arc lines

[/NOTE=<note text>]

Title for draft

[/FONT[FILE]=<font file name>]


[/F[ONT]SIZE=<font size>]
[/BIF={YES | NO}]

Using built-in font for plotter

[/PEN[NUM]=<No.of pens>] No.of pens (colors)


[/[MIN]LINE=<min line length for plotter>]
[/GAP=<Gap after plotting length>]
[/OUTM[AN]={YES | NO}]

Using Output Manager

[/COP[IES]=<No.of copies>] No.of copies for Output Manager


[/ALS[TART]={YES | NO}] Alert on Start in Output Manager
[/ALE[ND]={YES | NO}]

Alert on End in Output Manager

[/RME[ND]={YES | NO}]

Remove file on End in Output Manager

[/ONEP[AGE]={YES | NO}] Plot all draft on one page only


[/CEN0={YES | NO}] Is (0, 0) of Plotter in center of Page
[/MAN[FF]={YES | NO}]

Using manual Page Advance

[/OVER[LAP]={YES | NO}] Using continues / overlapping pages

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

[/BORD[ER]={YES | NO}]

Plot Border of Marker

[/[AUTO]MOT[ION]={YES | NO}] Prepare Moving Optimization


@MAR[KER]

Set marker size parameters.

[/LE[NGTH]=<length>]

Marker dimensions

[/HE[IGHT]=<height>]
[/XO=<x-left>]

Margins

[/XE=<x-right>]
[/YO=<y-bottom>]
[/YE=<y-top>]
[/PL[Y]=<No.of plies>]

Plies

[/MA[TERIAL]=<Material>] Material
[/FV={NO | YES}]

Marker full view mode

@CLE[AR]

Clear marker.

@GLO[BAL]

Set global pieces parameters.

[/TO[OL]=<Tool/Layer name for pieces external contour>]


[/HT[OOL]=<Tool/Layer name for piece holes>]
[/IT[OOL]=<Tool/Layer name for internal contours>]
[/NT[YPE]=<Notch type>

T, V, I, L, U, P

307

Mark Manual

308
[/NM[ODE]=<Notch mode>

D[RAW], C[UT], P[UNCH]

[/PM[ODE]=<Point mode>

D[RAW], C[UT], DR[ILL], ADR[ILL]

[/SI[DE]=<Side label> L[EFT], R[IGHT], B[OTH], LB, RB


Below is the same to @IMPORT command.
[/GB[UF]=<Buffer size>]
[/GD[IR]=<Rotation allows>]
[/GM[IR]=<Mirror allows>]
[/QU[ANTITY]=<Quantity>]
[/MA[TERIAL]=<Material>]
@NES[T]

AutoNesting (works as Continue command).

/AL[GORITHM]=<algorithm-type>
QUI[CK], QUA[LITY], TEX[TILE], NES[TER], COM[PACTION]
[/TI[ME]=<time>]

Time (minutes) for textile and nester algorithms

The batch file extension is *.BTF. Listed below are some example batches
files.
@UNIT /CM
@NEW
@IMPORT /FO=IGES /FILE=p1001.igs
@SAVE /FILE=p13001.dsp

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

309

@NEW
@SET /KEY=Bulge /VAL=0.045
@IMPORT /FO=IGES /FILE=p153029.igs
@SAVE /FILE=p153029.dsp
@NEW
@IMPORT /FO=IGES /FILE=p143027.igs
@SAVE /FILE=p143027.dsp
@!
The batch file shown above first defines the units of measure as centimeters,
imports the IGES file p13001.igs and saves it as P13001.dsp. Next IGES file
p153029.igs is imported with a bulge tolerance of .045 and saved as
p153029.dsp. Last IGES file p143027.igs is imported and saved as
p143027.dsp.
@UNIT /IN
@NEW
@MARKER /LENGTH=450 /HEIGHT=54 /PLY=3
@DESIGN /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\STRIPES.DSN /SEAM=CUT
/MATERIAL=STRIPES /SIZE=S /QUANTITY=4 /SIZE=M /QUANTITY=2
/SIZE=L /QUANTITY=1 /SIZE=XL /QUANTITY=1 /SIZE=XXL
/QUANTITY=2
@SAVE /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\TESTBAT.DSP

Mark Manual

310
@NEST

@SAVE /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\TESTBAT.DSP
@!
The batch file shown above first defines the units of measure as inches, creates
a new marker with a maximum length of 450 inches, a width of 54 inches, and
3 plies. The design file stripes is opened with cut lines and material group
stripes is defined. 4 small sizes, 2 size mediums, 1 size large, 1 size extra
large, and 2 size extra, extra large are requested. The newly requested marker
is saved as testbat.dsp. The new marker is then auto nested and saved.
@NEW
@OPEN /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\SPANT.DSP
@CLEAR
@NEST
@SAVE /FILE=C:\TEXWRK\EXAMPLES\SPANT.DSP
@!
The batch file shown above first starts a new job, then opens an existing
marker named SPANT.DSP. The pieces are cleared from the existing marker
and auto nesting begins. Once auto nesting is compile, the marker is saved as
SPANT.DSP

Stop Batch
To stop the Start Batch procedure, select Stop Batch from the Nesting Menu.
The Batch process is halted.

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

311

Continue Batch
Select the Continue Batch command to resume the batch procedure after
selecting Stop Batch.

Batch Messages
The Batch message file includes all remarks and errors that appear while
activating the Batch option. It will allow the user to follow Syntax errors while
running the batch file.

AutoNest Queue
The AutoNest Queue command prepares a queue of Marker files, which can
be left to nest overnight. A list of marker (DSP) files is created in a table and
to define Marker width, Maker Length, Time to Run.
It is also possible to select the method of nesting from Quick, Standard, or
Nest++.

To select files to the nest queue:

Click on the first file field and a little arrow appears.

Click on the arrow to browse you drive to select the desire file.

Mark Manual

312

You can select more then one file using the shift or the Ctrl key.

Click OK and the files will be added to the queue .

! Tip: To give all the files the same max. time point the mouse pointer to
the desired maximum time in one of the files and click on the right
button. Chose "equal all" and all the max. time will be equal in all
files.

Queue Menu

Save and Open Queue Files


The queue can be saved to disk as "autoNest queue file" (. nst) Open the saved
file from this menu.
Run
Select this command in order to start nesting the files in the queue.
Clear
This command clear the selected files from the queue list.

Chapter 9: Nesting Menu

313

Stop
This command stop the nesting process.
Export to Excel
The result can be exported to excel and help you to investigate, print and mail
the nest result.
Import to Excel
Queue can be imported from excel file. It bring you the option to crate a queue
on excel sheet or receive nest queue by e-mail and loaded it to the Optimark.
Close
Will close the multi nest dialog box

314

Mark Manual

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

315

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation


This chapter will guide how to install and configure a width range of plotters
and cutters types that supported by OptiTex.

Installing Algotex Plotters with SGS Software


Installing the Algotex Software

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to the parallel port (LPT2) on the


computer.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Create a directory called C:\TEXOPLOT\DATA

Copy all the files on the Algotex diskette into the C:\TEXOPLOT
directory.
The Algotex diskette contains the following files:
AUTO_DOT.EXE
AUTO_DOT.CNF
AUTO_DOT.HLP
AUTO_DOT.TXT
RASTEX.EXE
TEXOPLOT.ICO
README.DOC
README.TXT

Copy the ALGOTEXP.CFG file into the C:\TEXOPLOT directory.

316

Mark Manual

! Note: The ALGOTEXP.CFG file can be found on the diskette attached to


the plotter.

Create a directory called C:\OPTITEX\HPGL

Select START, SETTINGS, TASKBAR, START MENU


PROGRAMS, ADD.

BROWSE for and OPEN the following file.


C:\TEXOPLOT\RASTEX.EXE

Select NEXT. Select the OptiTex Program Group. Type RASTER


as the program name and select FINISH.

Select ADD, BROWSE for and OPEN the following file.


C:\TEXOPLOT\AUTO_DOT.EXE

Select NEXT. Select the OptiTex Program Group. Type PLOT as


the program name and select FINISH.

Select ADVANCED, under Start Menu, select the plus (+) sign to
the left of the word Programs. Highlight the OptiTex Program
Group. Copy (hold down the shift key and drag) the RASTER
program and PLOT program on the right side of the screen to the
STARTUP folder on the left side of the screen. You can now
CLOSE.

Using a text editor, edit the following file.


C:\TEXOPLOT\AUTO_DOT.CNF

Change the Recovery directory to C:\OPTITEX\HPGL and change


the Raster Data files directory to C:\TEXOPLOT\DATA

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

317

Save the changes to the AUTO_DOT.CNF file and return to the


WINDOWS desktop.

Restart the computer. Select START, SHUTDOWN, RESTART


COMPUTER.

Configuring the Alogotex Plotter in SGS software.


Once the Algotex software is installed, the SGS software can be configured to
work with the plotter.

Start the SGS PDS or MARK program.

From the FILE menu choose PLOTTER SETUP. A Dialog Box is


displayed.

Uncheck Use Output Manager.

Select OK.

If in working in PDS, display a piece on the screen. If working in


MARK, display a marker on the screen.

From the FILE menu select PLOT. Select SETUP from the lower
left side of the dialog box.

In the Plot Setting Dialog Box select HPGL as the format. In


Plotter Page Size, the X must be _____ and the Y must be the width
of the paper (72 inches is the maximum).

Select OK, the Plot Dialog Box is once again displayed. Make sure
that the following settings are unchecked while testing: Output
Manager, Use, Alert on Start, Remove on End, Alert on End.

Select OK.

318

Mark Manual

Hewlett Packard 600 or 700 Ink Jet Plotter


Connecting the plotter

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. If your HP Ink


Jet only came with a parallel cable, it will be necessary to order an
RS232 serial cable from Hewlett Packard or from your plotter
distributor. A generic cable will not work. Your plot files will not
plot on the HP Ink Jet unless you are using a cable from HP.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many
computers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (Interrupt
Request), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have
more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting
for one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailed
information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals
for your system.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

319

Configuring the output manger


Using the Outman as output manger:

From the START menu click OUTMAN from OptiTex sub-menu.

! Note: The OutMan will be named Outman-1 (or OutMan-2 if you specified
the plotter as pltr2.)

From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The


working units dialog box will display.

Choose the appropriate setting.

Click OK.

From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will display. Set the following port
options:
Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
Flow Control - XON/XOFF
Protocol - NONE

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

Click OK.

320

Mark Manual

! Note: If the exact length of the paper is unknown, estimate. The length of
the paper needs to be longer than the plot file that will be plotted.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close the


Outman.

Configuring Qman

Open the QMan by double clicking on the icon in the START


menu. Usually located in START>Optitex 8> Output control>
Qman

From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the appropriate working units. The selection should match


the working units that were set in the SGS Plot setup dialog box.

OutMan Path Setup

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT SETUP. The OutMan Setup
dialog box will display.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the
same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list
of available drive/directories on the right.

Click OK.

Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close the Qman.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

321

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port - the port to which the plotter is connected
Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
Flow Control - XON/XOFF
Protocol - NONE

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder
must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click on
the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

322

Mark Manual

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window.

Configuring the SGS programs


Plotter Setup
The Plotter Setup command in SGS Grade, PDS, and Mark is used to select
the location of the OutMan.ini file and the plotter to be used.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.

Place a pattern on the working area.

From the FILE menu, choose the PLOT command

Check the Use Output Manager field.

Select the output manger that you using.

For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotter
number in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK.

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Plot

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

323

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.
Use Output Manager - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the
plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting
chapter of the users manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1, Y=1.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The plotter number
depends on how many plotters were identified during the SGS software
installation process.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL/2.
Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center and Manual Page Replace both are disabled
(unchecked).

324

Mark Manual

Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font - Should be enabled (checked).
Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no
font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header
of the plot.
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008
Plotter Page Size
X - The X value is the marker length. It should be set to larger than the length
of your longest expected marker. However, this setting may be adjusted for
unusually long markers.
Y - The Y value should always be set to 35.5 inches (maximum plot width.)

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

325

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.5 inches. There is
no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this
setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not
plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. The pieces on the
working area will be sent to print on the plotter.

Hewlett Packard 750C Ink Jet Plotter


Connecting the plotter

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. If your HP Ink


Jet only came with a parallel cable, it will be necessary to order an
RS232 serial cable from Hewlett Packard or from your plotter
distributor. A generic cable will not work. Your plot files will not
plot on the HP Ink Jet unless you are using a cable from Hewlett
Packard.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many
computers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (Interrupt
Request), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have
more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting
for one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailed
information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals
for your system.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

326

Mark Manual

Be sure that the Page format in the HP750C Menu is set to Inked
Area. Please see attached diagram from the HP 750C Quick
Reference Guide.

Using the Outman as output manger:

From the START menu click on the OUTMAN in the OptiTex 8


folder.

From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The


working units dialog box will display.

Choose the appropriate setting.

Click OK.

From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will display.
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = XON/XOFF
Protocol = NONE

Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

327

Click OK.

! Note: If the exact length of the paper is unknown, estimate. The length of
the paper needs to be longer than the plot file that will be plotted.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close the


Outman.

Configuring Qman

From the START menu click on the QMAN in the OptiTex


directory.

From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the appropriate working units. The selection should match


the working units that were set in the SGS Plot setup dialog box.

From the FILE menu, choose OPTIONS. The OutMan Setup dialog
box will display.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as
specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list
of available drive/directories on the right.

Click OK.

Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close the Qman.

328

Mark Manual

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = XON/XOFF
Protocol = NONE

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

329

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window.

Configuring the SGS programs


Configuring the plotter through the SGS programs involves selecting a plotter,
configuring the plotter, and configuring the OutMan and the QMan. This
document gives basic settings and configuration instructions used for HP 750
plotters. For a detailed description of the plotting options, refer to the Plotting
section of the SGS Grade, Mark, or PDS manual. Also, refer to the plotting
tutorial located at the front of each manual.
Plotter Setup
The Plotter Setup command in SGS Grade, PDS, and Mark is used to select
the location of the OutMan.ini file and the plotter to be used.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT command.

Check the USE OUTPUT MANGER options.

Select the Output manger to use.

For OutMan users: browse to locate the outman.ini file. And enter
the plotter number.

330

Mark Manual

Plot

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting
chapter of the users manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1, Y=1.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The plotter number
depends on how many plotters were identified during the SGS software
installation process.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL/2.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

331

Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center and Manual Page Replace both are disabled
(unchecked).
Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no
font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header
of the plot.
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008
Plotter Page Size
X - The X value is the marker length. It should be set to larger than the length
of your longest expected marker. However, this setting may be adjusted for
unusually long markers.
Y - The Y value should always be set to 35.5 inches (maximum plot width.)

332

Mark Manual

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.5 inches. There is
no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this
setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not
plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been
setup.

Troubleshooting for the HP Ink Jet 750C


Make sure the I/O settings on the plotter have been setup. For instructions,
refer to the HP user manual. Settings should correspond with the port options
used in SGS software when configuring the OutMan. (See section,
Configuring Outman under Communication.)
Be sure that the Page format in the HP750C Menu is set to Inked Area. Please
see attached diagram from the HP 750C Quick Reference Guide.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

From the HP750C Quick Reference Guide

Front-Panel Menu (On Plotter) Structure


Page Format -> Size -> Oversize -> Inked Area

333

334

Mark Manual

Configuring the Hewlett Packard Draftmaster II Plotter


The HP Draftmaster II (model #7596A) plotter will not plot more than one
frame. A frame is 46 inches long.
Connecting the plotter

Turn your computer off.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on many
computers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (Interrupt
Request), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have
more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting
for one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailed
information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals
for your system.

Turn the computer on.

Turn the plotter on.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

335

Configuring SGS Programs


Plotter Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have a piece in the working
area.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog box
will be displayed.

Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next to


the Use Output Manager option. A small x should appear in the
box.

For OUTMAN users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting the


Browse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini
file.

Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e.
Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be
displayed.

Plot

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have a piece in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

336

Mark Manual

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting
chapter of the users manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale.
Options Plot Continuous - enabled
Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1, Y=1.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed.

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltr
listing depends on how many plotters you specified during your OptiTex
software installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to HPGL
Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center - enabled
Manual Page Replace - disabled.
Number of Pens - set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font - disabled.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

337

Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no
font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the
program.
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enable
cutting between the plots. (Commonly set to 4)
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008
Plotter Page Size
X - The X value should always be set to 46 inches. (Max frame size)
Y - The Y value should always be set to 34.5 inches. (Maximum plot width)

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time. There is no way to
adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is
set to anything else, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot
at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been
setup.

338

Mark Manual

Configuring the output manger


Using the Outman as output manger

Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control.

Working Units - From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING


UNITS. The working units dialog box will be displayed.

Choose the setting you wish to use.

Click OK.

From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will be displayed.

Communication
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = XON/XOFF
Protocol = NONE
Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using.

Click OK.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

339

! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and dont know the exact length,
estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you
wish to send.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running.

Configuring Qman

Open the QMan by double clicking on the icon at START manu/


OptiTex 8 / output manger.

Working Units

From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup.

OutMan Path Setup

From the OPTIONS menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan


Setup dialog box will be displayed.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the
same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list
of available drive/directories on the right.

Click OK.

Minimize the QMan, keeping it running.

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

340

Mark Manual

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from START menu, OptiTex folder.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow Control = XON/XOFF
Protocol = NONE

Click NEXT.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

341

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window.

342

Mark Manual

Ioline 28 Plotter
Connecting the plotter

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many
computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2
and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you
may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For
detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows
manuals for your system.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Install the Ioline software

Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive.

From the START menu, select RUN.

Type SETUP: A.

Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard.

Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

343

! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to the
Installation chapter of the Ioline users manual.
Test Plot
Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a test
plot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple test
plot files. The Send Plot File command is located in the FILE menu. For
instructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 28, refer to the Ioline users
manual.
Calibration Plot
Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter has
been configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated.
Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuring
the actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. The
Ioline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to the
plotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in the
CALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibration
program, refer to the Ioline users manual.
Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline
Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog box
will be displayed.

Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next to


the Use Output Manager option. A small x should appear in the
box.

344

Mark Manual

For OUTMAN users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting the


Browse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini
file.

Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e.
Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Plot

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the
Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.
Frame Advance After Last Frame Checked.
Bulge Corde Error controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the
truer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

345

slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches
as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the
plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL.
Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Number of Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Plotter Font File The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.
If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located in
C:\OptiTex).
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header
of the marker.

346

Mark Manual

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.
Plotter Page Size
Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory
setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are
using.
X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no
way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this
setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not
plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been
setup.

The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure the
OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan start automatically when a
plot file is sent to the plotter.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

347

Configuring the output manger


Use the Outman as output manger.

Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control.

Working Units
From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working
units dialog box will display.

Choose the appropriate setting.

Click OK.

Communication

From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will display.
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.
HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
DMPL (recommended)

348

Mark Manual

DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)


RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)
Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.
Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the
paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the output utility sub
folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units

From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the


working units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

349

OutMan Path Setup

From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan


Setup dialog box will display.
The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the
same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: Select the
Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of
available drive/directories on the right.

Click OK.

Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Hints
If the plotter does not plot, check the file name length. It should be limited to
8 alphanumeric characters.
Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

350

Mark Manual

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.
HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
DMPL (recommended)
DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)
RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)
Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.

Click NEXT.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

351

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window.

352

Mark Manual

Ioline 600 Plotter


Connecting the plotter

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many
computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2
and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you
may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For
detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows
manuals for your system.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Install the Ioline software

Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive.

From the START menu, select RUN.

Type SETUP: A.

Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard.

Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

353

! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to the
Installation chapter of the Ioline users manual.
Test Plot
Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a test
plot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple test
plot files. The Send Plot File command is located in the FILE menu. For
instructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 600, refer to the Ioline users
manual.
Calibration Plot
Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter has
been configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated.
Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuring
the actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. The
Ioline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to the
plotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in the
CALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibration
program, refer to the Ioline users manual.
Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline
Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog box
will be displayed.

Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next to


the Use Output Manager option. A small x should appear in the
box.

354

Mark Manual

For OutMan users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting the


Browse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini
file.

Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e.
Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Plot

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the
Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.
Frame Advance After Last Frame Checked.
Bulge Cord Error controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the
truer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

355

slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches
as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the
plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL.
Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Number of Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Plotter Font File The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.
If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located in
C:\OptiTex).
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header
of the marker.

356

Mark Manual

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.
Plotter Page Size
Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory
setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are
using.
X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no
way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this
setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not
plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been
setup.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

357

Configuring the output manger


Using the Outman as output manger.

Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control.

Working Units
From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working
units dialog box will display.

Choose the appropriate setting.

Click OK.

Communication

From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will display.
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.
HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
DMPL (recommended)
DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)

358

Mark Manual

RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)


Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.
Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the
paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the output utility sub
folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder/ Output Control

Working Units

From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the


working units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

OutMan Path Setup

From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan


Setup dialog box will display.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

359

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the
same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: Select the
Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of available
drive/directories on the right.

Click OK.

Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Hints
If the plotter does not plot, check the file name length. It should be limited to
8 alphanumeric characters.
Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

360

Mark Manual

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.
HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
DMPL (recommended)
DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)
RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)
Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

361

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window.

362

Mark Manual

Ioline Studio Plotter


Connecting the plotter

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many
computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2
and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you
may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For
detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows
manuals for your system.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Install the Ioline software

Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive.

From the START menu, select RUN.

Type SETUP: A.

Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard.

Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

363

! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to the
Installation chapter of the Ioline users manual.
Test Plot
Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a test
plot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple test
plot files. The Send Plot File command is located in the FILE menu. For
instructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 600, refer to the Ioline users
manual.
Calibration Plot
Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter has
been configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated.
Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuring
the actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. The
Ioline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to the
plotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in the
CALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibration
program, refer to the Ioline users manual.
Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline
Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Enable the Use Output Manager. A small x should appear in the


box.

364

Mark Manual

For OutMan users: Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini
(usually C:\Optitex) by clicking the Browse. Select the Plotter
number to be assigned to the Ioline.

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Plot

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the
Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.
Frame Advance After Last Frame Checked.
Bulge Cord Error controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the
truer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves
slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches
as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

365

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the
plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL.
Device Options
(0,0) In Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Number of Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Plotter Font File The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.
If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located in
C:\OptiTex).
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header
of the marker.
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

366

Mark Manual

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.
Plotter Page Size
Y The Y value should be 39.5 inches (the maximum plotting & cutting
width).
X The X value should be 46 inches (the plotter frame size).

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no
way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this
setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not
plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

4.
Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved
but the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and Qman were
not set.

Configuring the output manger


Using the OutMan as output manger

In the START menu, click on the OutMan icon at the OptiTex \


OUTPUT CONTROL folder.

From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The


working units dialog box will display.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

Choose the appropriate setting.

Click OK.

367

Communication

From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will display.
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.
HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
DMPL (recommended)
DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)
RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)
Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

368

Mark Manual

Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the
paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control
sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units

From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the


working units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

OutMan Path Setup

From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan


Setup dialog box will display.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the
same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list
of available drive/directories on the right.

Click OK.

Minimize the Qman keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

369

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1

370

Mark Manual

Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.
HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
DMPL (recommended)
DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)
RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)
Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.


Close or minimize the OCC window

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

371

Ioline Stylist Plotter


Connecting the plotter

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many
computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2
and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you
may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For
detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows
manuals for your system.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline


Plot Setup
The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini
and the plotter.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Enable the Use Output Manager. A small x should appear in the


box.

372

Mark Manual

Select the output manger that you using

For OutMan users: locate the outman.ini file by clicking on the


browse button and select the Plotter number to be assigned to the
Ioline.

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Plot

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the
Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

373

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the
plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to DMPL.
Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Number of Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no
font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the
program.
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.

374

Mark Manual

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.
Plotter Page Size
Y - The Y value is the width of the paper. The factory setting is 72 inches.
Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are using.
X- The X value should always be set to 36 inches.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 36 inches. There is no
way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this
setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not
plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been
setup.

Configuring the output manger


Using the Outman as output manger

Open the OutMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control
sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The


working units dialog box will display.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

Choose the appropriate setting.

Click OK.

375

Communication

From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will display.
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.
DMPL
DTR/DSR = disabled (unchecked)
RTS/CTS = disabled (unchecked)
Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

376

Mark Manual

Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the
paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control
sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder

Working Units

From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the


working units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

Path Setup
The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as
specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list
of available drive/directories on the right.

Click OK.

Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

377

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

378

Mark Manual

DMPL
DTR/DSR = disabled (unchecked)
RTS/CTS = disabled (unchecked)
Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

379

Configuring the Ioline Summit Plotter For Use With SGS Software
Connecting the plotter

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many
computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2
and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you
may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For
detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows
manuals for your system.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Install the Ioline software

Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive.

From the START menu, select RUN.

Type SETUP: A.

Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard.

Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup.

380

Mark Manual

! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to


the Installation chapter of the Ioline users manual.
Test Plot
Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a test
plot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple test
plot files. The Send Plot File command is located in the FILE menu. For
instructions on sending a test file to the Summit, refer to the Ioline users
manual.
Calibration Plot
Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter has
been configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated.
Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuring
the actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. The
Ioline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to the
plotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in the
CALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibration
program, refer to the Ioline users manual.
Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline
Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Select the Output manger to use.

Enable the Use Output Manager. A small x should appear in the


box.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

381

For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the


box, select Browse to locate the outman.ini file. Select the Plotter
number to be assigned to the Ioline.

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Plot

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the
Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.
Frame Advance After Last Frame Checked.
Bulge Corde Error controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the
truer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves
slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches
as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.

382

Mark Manual

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the
plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL.
Device Options
(0,0) In Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Number of Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Plotter Font File The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.
If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located in
C:\OptiTex).
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header
of the marker.
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

383

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.
Plotter Page Size
Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory
setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are
using.
X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no
way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this
setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not
plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been
setup.

The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure the
OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan start automatically when a
plot file is sent to the plotter.

384

Mark Manual

Configuring the output manger.


Using the OutMan as Output manger

Open the OutMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control
sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units
From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working
units dialog box will display.

Choose the appropriate setting.

Click OK.

Communication

From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will display.
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and
DMPL.HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
DMPL (recommended)
DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

385

RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)


Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.
Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the
paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configure the Qman

Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control
sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units

From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the


working units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

OutMan Path Setup

From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan


Setup dialog box will display.

386

Mark Manual

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the
same as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list
of available drive/directories on the right.

Click OK.

Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

387

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.
HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
DMPL (recommended)
DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)
RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)
Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)
Protocol = NONE.

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.


Close or minimize the OCC window

388

Mark Manual

Troubleshooting Tips for the Ioline Summit Plotter


Ioline software shows no plotter:
Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try another
cable.
Perform the Serial Test: included with the Ioline Control Center software.
For instructions on performing this test refer to the Summit Users Guide.
Blinking red light on plotter after plot has been sent:
Communication problems: Check the following:
Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try another
cable.
Port Configuration - Make sure the port is configured correctly:
Baud rate =9600
Parity =none
Data bits =8
Stop bits =1
Flow control
HPGL =

DTR/DSR-enabled

RTS/CTS-enabled
Xon/Xoff- disabled
DMPL =

DTR/DSR-disabled

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

389

RTS/CTS-disabled
Xon/Xoff- enabled
Port - Have port checked.
Plotter - Run Plotter Port Test, which requires a diagnostic module available
from Ioline.
The Ioline plotter wont plot:
Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try another
cable.
OutMan - Make sure it is running, the communication and handshake settings
are correct and the protocol is set to none.
QMan - Make sure it is running. Make sure the OutMan path is specified
correctly.
Ioline is in Stop Mode - Press the Start/Stop key to put the plotter in start
mode (green light).
Test plot - Send a test plot from DOS or Ioline Control Panel software. If the
plotter doesnt plot from Ioline software, refer to the troubleshooting guide in
the Ioline users manual.
The Ioline Plotter Plots Incorrectly, Doesnt finish the plot, skips parts of
the plot or leaves large gaps between frames:
Frame Size - Frame size is set incorrectly. Frame size should be X = 46, Y =
width of paper, typically 72.
Plots garbage:

390

Mark Manual

Language - Make sure the correct language is being sent. Language for this
plotter is set to either DMPL or HPGL.
Plots too large/small:
Scale Factor - Make sure the Scale Factor in the Plot dialog box is set to X=1
Y=1.
Calibrate - Run the calibration program that comes with the Ioline control
panel. For instructions on the calibration process refer to the Ioline users
manual.
Fonts are too small/large in the HEADER of the marker:

Adjust the font size in the Plot Setting dialog box in the SGS
programs. The plot setting dialog box is accessed by:

From the FILE menu choose PLOT.

Select the Setup button on the lower right of the dialog box.

Enter the desired font size in the Default Font Size box.

Click OK.

! Note: If you change the font size and the fonts are still plotting incorrectly,
delete the Optikad.ini file located in the Windows directory and reconfigure plot settings.
Piece Information fonts are too large or too small:

From the SGS MARK program, select the PIECE pulldown Menu,
then select GLOBAL INFO.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

391

On the right hand side of the Global pieces information dialog box,
locate the box called, Adjust Descriptions.

Enter in the desired maximum text size. For example, if the text
was previously too large when set to 1, change the setting to .5
and click APPLY.

Create a test plot to make sure the new text size is acceptable. If
further changes are necessary, repeat steps 1 - 3.

! Note: This setting adjusts the maximum text size for the standard piece
information (or piece descriptions). On larger pieces, the text will
plot at the maximum set size. On smaller pieces, text will plot smaller
to fit on the piece.
Internal fonts are too large or too small:

From the SGS MARK program, select the PIECE pull down Menu,
then select GLOBAL INFO.

On the right hand side of the Global pieces information dialog box,
locate the box called, Internal Texts.

Enter in the desired minimum and maximum sizes. For example, if


internal text should only be between .25 and 1, set this box
accordingly. Internal text will plot no smaller than .25 and no
larger than 1.

Create a test plot to make sure text is acceptable. If further changes


are necessary, repeat steps 1 - 3.

! Note: This setting adjusts the text size for internal texts (text added with the
text tool).

392

Mark Manual

Leaves too much or not enough gap between jobs/copies:


Check the Gap after Plotting setting in the Plot Setting dialog box. The Plot
Setting dialog box can be accessed by:

From the FILE menu choose PLOT.

Select the Setup button on the lower right of the Plot dialog box.

Enter in a new value in the Gap After Plotting box.

Click OK.

Pen rips the paper during plot:


Make sure pen is loaded correctly (it must be lined up on the edges of the roll
feeds).
Check the pen force.
Pen may be out of ink.
Pen may be broken.
Paper pressure roller must not be placed over the two connection points of the
paper advance bar.
Plots very Slowly:
Make sure the file format is set up correctly.

For more troubleshooting tips refer to the Ioline users guide.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

393

Plotter Technology Plotter


Configuring SGS Programs
Plot Setup
The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini
and the plotter.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. Plot dialog box will display.

Enable the Use Output Manager. A small x should appear in the


box.

For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the


box, select Browse and Select the directory that contains the
OutMan.ini. Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Plotter
Technology Neon plotter.

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Plot

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.

394

Mark Manual

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional, but are usually checked on. For detailed information on each of these
options, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.
Bulge Set to .008
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the
plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to HP-GL PlotTec.
Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Number of Pens - Set to 1.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

395

Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font - Should be disabled. (Unchecked)
Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file. If no font file is shown,
select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the
program.
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Plotter Technology
plotters.
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.
Plotter Page Size
Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory
setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are
using.
X- The X value should always be set to 20 inches for a 36 Neon
The X value should always be set to 30 inches for a 72 Neon

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 20 or 30 inches.
There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the

396

Mark Manual

plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot
incorrectly or not plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been
setup.

The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure the
OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan were added to the Startup
group when SGS software was installed, which means they will start
automatically when Windows is started.
Configuring the output manger
Using the OutMan as output manger

Open the OutMan by double clicking on the icon at the OUTPUT


CONTROL sub directory. It can be found in START > OPTIEX 8>
OUTPUT CONTROL

Working Units
From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working
units dialog box will display.

Choose the appropriate setting.

Click OK.

Communication

From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will display.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

397

Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = RTS/CTS is checked.
Xon/Xoff is checked
Protocol = None.
Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the
paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on
COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse
and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter
and modem.

398

Mark Manual

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = RTS/CTS is checked.
Xon/Xoff is checked
Protocol = None.

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

399

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window

Hints
Use cardboard for the paper take-up roll PVC is too heavy.
If using Heat Seal paper, set the plotter speed to low.
When changing to a new roll of Heat Seal paper, swipe the surface that the
paper would touch with a rag lightly dampened with liquid fabric softener.
(This reduces the static electricity that the Heat Seal paper generates).

400

Mark Manual

Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter


Connecting the plotter

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter to COM1 or COM2 on the computer.

! Note: On many computers, COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and
COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3
serial port devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of
the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the
DOS and Windows manuals for the system.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

! Note: The Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter must be set up in AutoSence mode.
Configuring output manger
Using the Outman as output manger

In the START menu, click OptiTex, and OUTMAN.

From the OPTIONS menu, select WORKING UNITS.

Choose the appropriate setting. Click OK.

From the OPTIONS menu, select COMMUNICATION. Set the


following port options.
Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

401

Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
DTR/DSR - unchecked
RTS/CTS - unchecked
Xon/Xoff - checked
Protocol - NONE.

Click OK.

Click SET next to Paper on Roll dialog box.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper. Click OK.

! Note: The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you wish to
send.

Minimize the OutMan. (Do not close OutMan).

Configuring QMan

In the START menu click OPTITEX 8, and QMan.

From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

Choose the appropriate setting. Click OK.

From the OPTIONS menu, select OUTMAN PATH.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the
same as specified in the Plot Setup.

Minimize the QMan. (Do not close QMan).

402

Mark Manual

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
DTR/DSR - unchecked

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

403

RTS/CTS - unchecked
Xon/Xoff - checked
Protocol - NONE.

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window

Configuring SGS Software


Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.

From the FILE menu, select the PLOT command.

Click Use Output Manager field. Select the output manger that you
using.

For Outman users: Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini

Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Calcomp TechJet


720.

404

Mark Manual

Click OK.

Plot dialog box

From the FILE menu, select PLOT.

In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

Use checked
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, copies - optional.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.
Plotter Setting -Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box is displayed.
Plotter Setup dialog box
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2
Format HPGL
(0,0) in Page Center unchecked
Manual Page Replace checked
Use CR/LF in code checked
Use M70 unchecked
Use bitefeed offset unchecked

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

405

Gap After Plotting - amount of space left between plots.


Minimal Cut/Plot Line 0
Use Plotters Built-in Font checked
Plotter Font File - eng.fnt file and its directory. If no font file is shown,
select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - size of the text to the plot.
Number of Pen 0
Min. Plot Spline Segment - .008
Plotter Page Size - X- 48 inches, Y-34.8 or width of paper.

Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

! Note: The Calcomp TechJet 720 plotter model 5436R does not
automatically advance the paper after each frame. The user must
select CONTINUE at the plotter after each frame. A one-inch gap is
placed between each frame (paper advance).

! Note: Calcomps technical support number is 1-800-458-5888.


! Note: The Calcomp 907/PCI Vector mode driver sometimes works in the
SGS OptiMark

406

Mark Manual

Gerber AP300 and AP310 Plotters


! Note: It is not necessary to install any Gerber Software
Configuring the output manger
Using the Outman as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the Outman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired
WORKING UNITS.

In the OPTIONS Menu, select COMMUNICATION.

In the Communication Dialog Box select the following:


Port : the port to which the plotter is connected
Baud Rate : 9600
Data Bits :8
Parity : None

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

407

Stop Bits : 1
Flow Control : turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)
Communication Protocol : Gerber

Minimize the Outman. (Do not close Outman.)

Configuring the Qman

Open the Qman and from the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired
WORKING UNITS.

In the OPTIONS Menu, select OUTMAN SETUP.

In the OUTMAN SETUP dialog box, select Outman.ini located in


the directory where the SGS software was loaded. (The default
directory is C:\Optitex)

Select PLTR1 in the Plotter Name area. (If you have more than one
plotter, select the desired plotter number)

Minimize the Qman. (Do not close Qman)

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

408

Mark Manual

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port : the port to which the plotter is connected
Baud Rate : 9600
Data Bits :8
Parity : None
Stop Bits : 1
Flow Control : turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)
Communication Protocol: Gerber

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

409

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window.

Configuring the Plotter in SGS Software


Once the plotter is configured and the serial port communications have been
adjusted, SGS software is configured to use the plotter.

Start the SGS PDS or MARK software.

From the FILE menu, select PLOTT.

Check the Use Output Manager field.

Select the output manger that you using.

For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotter
number in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK.

Display a pattern piece on the screen.

From the FILE menu, select PLOT. In the PLOTTER/CUTTER


section of the PLOT dialog box, select SETUP.

In the DRIVER FORMAT field of the PLOT SETTING dialog


box, select AP-GL Gerber Plotter. In Plotter Page Size, the X must
be 16.25 (the frame size) and the Y must be the width of the paper.
(72 inches is the maximum)

Select OK in the PLOT SETTINGS dialog box.

410

Mark Manual

The following settings should be checked:


Output Manager- Use
Alert on Start
Remove on End
Alert on End

Select OK in the PLOT dialog box.

Troubleshooting
If nothing happens
If you get an error message at the plotter display
If the plotter does not move
It is probably a communication problem. Recheck your hardware
communication, recheck the setup of the parameters in the output manager, or
try replacing the plotter cable.
If the plotter reacts (something moves) but not correctly
Recheck the format setup and the frame dimensions. Try to plot a smaller
marker with only one piece that is smaller than one frame.
Tips
The plotter side of the communication cable is a 9 pin female adapter. The
computer side of the cable is a 25 pin female adapter, Gerber part number
055409000 Rev.-A. A 25 to 9 pin adapter may be necessary in order to attach
the cable to the computer.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

411

Gerber AP700 Plotter


! Note: It is not necessary to install any Gerber Software
Configuring the output manger
Using the Outman as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.


Power on- Big red button to the right.
Press ENTERS to enable (dot with a circle around it)
Initialize F2 (goes to origin)
F1 (goes on-line)

Open the Outman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired
WORKING UNITS.

In the OPTIONS Menu, select COMMUNICATION.

In the Communication Dialog Box select the following:

412

Mark Manual

Port - the port to which the plotter is connected


Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
Flow Control turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)
Communicate Protocol: Gerber

Minimize the Outman. (Do not close Outman).

Configuring the Qman

Open the Qman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desired
WORKING UNITS.

In the OPTIONS Menu, select OUTMAN PATH SETUP.

In the OUTMAN SETUP dialog box, select Outman.ini located in


the directory where the SGS software was loaded. (The default
directory is C:\Optitex)

Select PLTR1 in the Plotter Name area. (If you have more than one
plotter, select the desired plotter number)

Minimize the Qman. (Do not close Qman)

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

413

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port - the port to which the plotter is connected
Baud Rate - 9600
Data Bits - 8
Parity - None
Stop Bits - 1
Flow Control turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)
Communication Protocol: Gerber

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

414

Mark Manual

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window.

Configuring the Plotter in SGS Software


Once the plotter is configured and the serial port communications have been
adjusted, SGS software is configured to use the plotter.

Start the SGS PDS or MARK software.

From the FILE menu, select PLOT command

Check the Use Output Manager field.

Select the output manger that you using.

For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotter
number in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK.

Display a pattern piece on the screen.

From the FILE menu, select PLOT. In the PLOTTER/CUTTER


section of the PLOT dialog box, select SETUP.

In the DRIVER FORMAT field of the PLOT SETTING dialog box,


select AP-GL Gerber Plotter. In Plotter Page Size, the X must be
16.25 (the frame size) and the Y must be the width of the paper. (72
inches is the maximum)

Select OK in the PLOT SETTINGS dialog box.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

415

The following settings should be checked:


Output Manager- Use
Alert on Start
Remove on End
Alert on End

Select OK in the PLOT dialog box.

Troubleshooting
If nothing happens
If you get an error message at the plotter display
If the plotter does not move
It is probably a communication problem. Recheck your hardware
communication, recheck the setup of the parameters in the output manager, or
try replacing the plotter cable.
If the plotter reacts (something moves) but not correctly
Recheck the format setup and the frame dimensions. Try to plot a smaller
marker with only one piece that is smaller than one frame.
Tips
The AP700 has the serial port on the INSIDE of the plotter. It is necessary to
remove some screws in order to find the port.
The AP700 plotter cable is a 25 pin female on computer side and 25 pin on
plotter side, Gerber part number 050225-002, E dated 11-89 DSC. A 25 to 9
pin adapter may be necessary in order to attach the cable to the computer.

416

Mark Manual

NovaJet Plotter
Connecting the plotter

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many
computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2
and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you
may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For
detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows
manuals for your system.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Configuring SGS Programs for the NovaJet


Plot Setup
The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini
and the plotter.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Enable the Use Output Manager A small x should appear in the


box.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

417

For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the


box, select Browse and Select the directory that contains the
OutMan.ini. Select the Plotter number assigned to the NovaJet

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

Plot

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the
Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

418

Mark Manual

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the
plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL
Device Options
(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).
Number of Pens - Set to 1.
Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font - Should be enabled (checked).
Plotter Font File - Should be grayed out if using plotters built in font. If not
using the plotters built in font , the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should
be displayed. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - This setting determines the default size of the text on the
plot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the
program.
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

419

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.
Plotter Page Size
Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory
setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are
using.
X- The X value should always be set to 35.6.
*See your NovaJet manual for frame size. The size varies depending on the
model of the NovaJet.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.6 inches. There is
no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this
setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not
plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been
setup.

Configuring the output manger


Using the OutMan as output manger.

Open the OutMan by clicking on the OutMan icon in the START


menu. The icon can be found in the OUTPUT CONTROL folder at
OptiTex 8 menu.

420

Mark Manual

Working Units
From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The working
units dialog box will display.

Choose the appropriate setting.

Click OK.

Communication

From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will display.
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow = HPGL
HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

Click OK.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

421

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the
paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

Click on START > Optitex 8 > OUTPUT CONTROL > QMAN

Working Units

From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the


working units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

From the FILE menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup
dialog box will display.

Path Setup
The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same
as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list
of available drive/directories on the right.

Click OK.

Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

422

Mark Manual

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port Options
Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

423

Flow = HPGL
HPGL
DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)
Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)
Protocol = NONE.

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Close or minimize the OCC window

424

Mark Manual

Numonics Design Partner 9000 Plotter


Connecting the plotter

Turn your computer off.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on many
computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2
and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you
may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For
detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows
manuals for your system.

Turn the computer on.

Turn the plotter on.

Configuring the SGS progrem


Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the working
area.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot Select dialog box will
be displayed.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

425

Enable the Use Output Manager. A checkmark will be placed in


the box.

For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the


box select Browse and Select the directory that contains the
OutMan.ini. .assign the plotter number.

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be
displayed.

Plot

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting
chapter of the users guide, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale.
Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1 Y=1.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed.

426

Mark Manual

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltr
listing depends on how many plotters you specified during software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to Design Partner
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enable
cutting between the plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for the Ioline plotters.
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.
Plotter Page Size
X - The X value should be the frame size.
Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory
setting is 72 inches, you will need to adjust according to the paper size you are
using.

! Note: The Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of paper the
plotter feeds and tracks at a time. There is no way to adjust the frame
size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set to anything
else the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

427

Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QueMan have not
been setup.

Configuring the output manger


Using the OutMan as output manger

Click on the OutMan icon at the START menu. It can be found at


START > OptiTex 8 >OUTPUT CONTROL

Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The


working units dialog box will be displayed.

Choose the setting you wish to use.

Click OK.

Communication

From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will be displayed.
Port Options
Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow =
DTR/DSR = Not enabled (no check in the box)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (check in box.)
Xon/Xoff = Not enabled (no check in the box)

428

Mark Manual

Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed.

Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using.

Click OK.

! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and dont know the exact length,
estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you
wish to send.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running.

Configuring QueMan

Click on the Qman icon in the START menu. It can be found at


START> OptiTex 8> OUTPUT CONTROL > QMAN

Working Units

From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup.

OutMan Path Setup

From the OPTION menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan


Setup dialog box will be displayed.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same
as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list
of available drive/directories on the right.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

Click OK

Minimize the QueMan keeping it running.

429

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port Options
Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.

430

Mark Manual

Baud Rate = 9600


Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Flow =
DTR/DSR = Not enabled (no check in the box)
RTS/CTS = Enabled (check in box.)
Xon/Xoff = Not enabled (no check in the box)

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

431

Summagraphic HighPlot 7100/7200 Plotter


Connecting the plotter

Turn your computer off.

Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified
as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.

! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on many
computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2
and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you
may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For
detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows
manuals for your system.

Turn the computer on.

Turn the plotter on.

Configuring the SGS programs.


Plot Setup
The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini
and the plotter you want to use.

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the working
area.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be
displayed.

432

Mark Manual

Enable the Use Output Manager. A checkmark will be placed in the


box.

For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in the


box select Browse and locate the directory that contains the
OutMan.ini Select the Pltr. number you want to assign to the Ioline.

Click OK.

From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be
displayed.

Plot

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the working
area.
Output Manager
Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are
optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting
chapter of the users guide, or the plotting tutorial.
Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale.
Options - Should be set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1 Y=1.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

433

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltr
listing depends on how many plotters you specified during software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to DMPL, HPGL/2 or HPGL
Generic. DMPL is recommended.
Font Options
Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed
plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enable
cutting between the plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for the Ioline plotters.
Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.
Plotter Page Size
X - The X value should always be set to the plotter frame size.
Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory
setting is 72 inches, you will need to adjust according to the paper size you are
using.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of
paper the plotter feeds and tracks at a time. There is no way to adjust
the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set to
anything else the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

434

Mark Manual

Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but the
plot will not be sent because the OutMan and QueMan have not
been setup.

Configuring the output manger


Using the OutMan as output manger

Open the OutMan by double clicking on the icon at the START


menu. It can be found at START> OPTIETX 8> OUTPUT
CONTROL> OUTMAN.

Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The


working units dialog box will be displayed.

Choose the setting you wish to use.

Click OK.

Communication

From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. The


Communication dialog box will be displayed.
Port Options

Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1
Paper Size

Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using.

Click OK.

435

! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and dont know the exact length,
estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you
wish to send.

Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running.

Configuring the Qman

Open the QueMan by double clicking on the icon at the START


menu. It can be found at START>OPTITEX 8> OUTPUT
CONTROL> QMAN

Working Units

From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS.

Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup.

OutMan Path Setup

From the FILE menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup
dialog box will be displayed.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same
as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list
of available drive/directories on the right.

Click OK

436

Mark Manual

Using the OCC as output manger

Turn off the computer.

Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably


COM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same
time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4
or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and
digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and
modem.

Turn on the computer and the plotter.

Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START
menu.

In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

Select the my computer option. Click NEXT.

In the Communication Setting select the following:


Port Options
Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop Bits = 1

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

437

Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue
folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.
Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.

! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and
computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to
share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.


Close or minimize the OCC window

438

Mark Manual

Lectra plotter
Connecting Lectra Plotter to your Computer
In order to connect "Lectra" plotter to your computer you need to have a
special cross 25 pins serial cable.
This is the serial cable schema:
"Lectra" Plotter pins number: You Computer pins number:

"Lectra" Plotter is using only 4 pins on the 25 pins serial cable.


Pin number 1 in Lectra go to pin number 1 on your computer.
Pin number 2 in Lectra go to pin number 2 on your computer.
Pin number 3 in Lectra go to pin number 3 on your computer.
Pin number 7 in Lectra go to pin number 5 on your computer.

! Note: Lectra pin number 7 is a ground, on a new PC computer pin number


8 can be the ground connection! This means that to need connect
Lectra pin number 7 to pin number 8 on the PC!!
In order to drive "Lectra" plotter you need create this kind of 25 pins serial
cable!!

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

439

Where to connect your serial cable in "Lectra" plotter:


"Lectra" plotter module E32 or E33 has 7 serial COM output connects. One of
those 7 output connectors goes in to "Lectra" terminal. The terminal
connection is a flat serial cable with only 4 pins, you need to disconnect this
terminal cable and connect the terminal connection directly to you computer.
Don't put your cable in the terminal connections on the plotter, connect the
terminal to your computer directly with your special crossed serial cable. Now
you can plot to your "Lectra" plotter.
In order to initialize the plotter you don't need "Lectra" terminal (you can use
"Lectra" terminal if you want to calibrate your plotter). OptiTex
communication driver will initialize the plotter and set the pen position to
point 0.0!
Warnings:

The default frame size is Y- 180 and X- 35. The frame size can
change (in case you are driving Lectra E-32 machine) from OptiTex
plot dialog box.

The emergency stop button on the plotter is not supported. Once


you stopped the plotting. With the stop button, you have to re-send
the whole file again.

The Lectra Terminal is disabled once you use OptiTex.

OptiTex Lectra driver will initialize automatically before starting to


plot.

How to Create Lectra Plot file in OptiTex version 8:

After you finish nesting your pieces and you're ready to plot, go to
Plot dialog box.

440

Mark Manual

Check and enable "Use Output manager" option, select "OCC"


("output manager service") section and press the Setup button.

"Plotter Setup" dialog will be appearing.


Note: if you are working with Win98 or Win95 you will need to
install OptiTex and reboot the computer in order to replace
msvcrt.dll and msvcp60.dll in your Windows system folder.
Without replacing these *.DLL the "Plotter Setup" dialog will work!

Press the "Add" button to create a new plotter name and plotter
queue.

To select a computer: select network or local computer (in order to


select a network computer you need to have a network computer
that already has a shared plotter queue) and then press "Next".

! Note: The enclosed explanation describes a local computer selection track.

In the next dialog "Communication Setting" select "Lectra protocol"


and the relevant COM port, DO NOT change any others
communication parameters and press the "next" button.

The next dialog is a "Local Plotter Setting". In the plotter name


Dialog box, write your plotter name. You can use any name but we
suggest using "Lectra".
(Dont change the queue path for sharing, if your operating system
is not NT, you will need to define the share queue folder manually,
if you want other computers on the network to be able to plot to
your plotter.)
Press "finish" button.

Now you're back to the main "Plotter Setup" dialog window. Select
your new plotter (Lectra) and press on "default button.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

441

Close "Plotter Setup" dialog with "Close" button.

If the plotter queue that you've just created is new, the


"Plotter/Cutter Setup" dialog will open automatically. Select from
the driver format "Lectra Flat Bed Plotter" driver. Don't change the
plotter page size! It's recommended to use OptiTex font and not the
Plotter font (don't use "use build - in font" option).

Confirm your setting with Ok button. Now you're in "Plot" dialog


box and here you will see "Alert on start" option. If this option is
checked, the job that you are sending to the plotter is in "Hold"
attribute on the OCC ".

Confirm your settings and send the job to the plotter by pressing the
Ok button.
Now the OCC will open. How to use OCC "(Output Control
Center):
The " OCC " is the OptiTex new output system and in order to drive
"Lectra" plotter you need to work with the "OCC". The new OCC
" supports "Lectra" communication driver.

When the "OCC " is loaded (after you press the "plot" dialog box
"ok" button), you will see your plotter name in the "OCC" left side
under "All queues" header and your current job (the plotting data)
will be in the "OCC" right side under "Jobs".

If you job status is hold (remember "Alert on start" option in "Plot"


dialog is checked) then in order to send the job to the plotter, press
on the "green flag" icon on the tool bar and your job will be send to
the plotter.

In order to "re-send" a job you can go to "Done" under the queue


name on the OCC " left side, select the job and press the "restart"

442

Mark Manual

button on " OCC " tool bar. You can also delete a job, stop a job and
sort jobs.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

443

Configuring the Cutting Edge Cutter


Connect the cutter
The cutter must be assembled and installed.
Install the Cutting Edge Software
Cutting Edge uses the Base module software to drive the cutter.
Configuring the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Mark software

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.

In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

Use checked
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies - optional.
Options -Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.
Format - Cutting Edge

444

Mark Manual

(0,0) In Page Center unchecked


Manual Page Replace checked
Use CR/LF in code checked
Use M70 unchecked
Use bitefeed offset unchecked
Gap After Plotting - amount of space left between plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - 0
Plotter Font File - eng.fnt file and its directory. If no font file is shown,
select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - size of the text to the plot.
Number of Pen 0
Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008
Plotter Page Size = X- longer than maximum marker
Y- useable width of paper minus margins

! Note: Page Size is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,
in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area
that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker
size when creating an NC file, the file will be blank.

Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

445

Tips
Buttons with drill attributes work best when exporting to a Cutting Edge
cutter.
Using an AUX Drill attribute on buttons will execute a CUT command at the
cutter.
Using a Drill attribute on buttons will execute a DRILL command at the cutter.
Using a Cut attribute on buttons will execute a DRILL command at the cutter.
Using a Draw attribute on buttons will execute an INK command at the cutter.
I notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Cutting Edge
cutter.
T notches will draw as I notches at the cutter.
U, V, L, and box notches will cut the same shape at the cutter.
Operational Stops insert an M01 command at the cutter that causes the cutter
to pause before or after execution.
Darts will display as INK commands. The way that darts are displayed in the
SGS software determines how darts are displayed at the cutting edge machine.
When requesting the .NC file from the Mark software, Axis lines (pleats)
display as solid INK lines. When requesting the .NC file from the PDS
software, Axis lines (pleats) display as INK notches at the beginning and end
of the line.
Internal lines display as INK or CUT lines depending on how the line
attributes are set in the SGS software.

446

Mark Manual

Piece Descriptions and internal text display as ANNOTATION at the Cutting


Edge machine.
If the Base line is displayed in the SGS software, the baseline will display as
an INK command at the cutting edge machine.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

447

Eastman Cutter
There are several steps to follow when using the Eastman Cutter with the SGS
software:

Installing the Eastman EasyCut program;

Creating a .GBR file from Scanvec software;

Importing the SGS .GBR file into Eastman software and cutting the
file.

This document provides information for step 2 above. For steps 1 and 3, please
refer to Eastman documentation.
Configuring SGS software
This document gives basic settings and configuration instructions used for
Eastman cutters.
Plot

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will
display.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece or a marker in the
working area.
File Name - Type in the name and path of the file. For example, if the file is to
be sent to a floppy diskette, type: A:\filename
If the file is to be sent to a directory on the C drive, type:
C:\directoryname\filename

448

Mark Manual

Output Manager - Use Output Manager, Alert on Start, Alert on End,


Remove on End -Disable all of these options.
Page Format
Single and Multiple- Disable (uncheck).
Fixed Scale - Enable (checked).
Options
Plot Continuous - Enable (checked).
Scale Factor
X=1

Y=1

Check Intersections, Order by Tools, and One Page -Disable all of these
options.
Bulge - Set at .008
Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting
Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the
plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software
installation.
Format - Plotter Language should be set to Eastman Cutter.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

449

Device Options
(0,0) In Page Center - Disable (unchecked).
Number of Pens -Set at 0.
Manual Page Replace - Disable (unchecked).
Use CR/LF in code -Enable (checked)
Use M70 - Disable (unchecked).
Use bite feed offset - Disable (unchecked).
Font Options
Use Plotters Built-in Font -Enable (checked)
Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no
font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the
program.
Gap After Plotting - Set at 0.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line - Set at 0.
Min. Plot Spline Segment- This setting determines the smallest spline or arc
to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be
adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.

450

Mark Manual

Plotter Page Size


X =128 The X value represents the frame size or table length.
Y = 43.5

The Y value represents the width of the material.

! Note: Be sure to set this setting correctly. If is set incorrectly, the cutter will
not cut or will cut incorrectly.

Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

Click OK in the Plot dialog box.

A .GBR file has now been generated and should be located under the path and
file name that was entered at the beginning of this section under File Name.
Tips
1/4 inch T notches with a cut and no stop attribute cut best at the Eastman
cutter.
Buttons with a Drill M43 attribute cut best at the cutter.

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

451

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S3250


Connect the cutter
The cutter must be assembled and installed.
Install the Gerber Software
Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter.
Configuring the SGS software

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.

In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

(Use = checked)
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional
Page Format = fixed scale
Options = Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1
Whole pieces in frame only
Check intersections before plotting
Optimize Plot/Cut Order

452

Mark Manual

Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.
Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.
Format = Gerber Cutter
(0,0) in Page Center = unchecked
Manual Page Replace = unchecked
Use CR/LF in code = unchecked
*Use initialization in file header (M70) = checked
Use Bitefeed Offset = unchecked (if using Version 7.x. If using a lower
version: *Use bitefeed offset = checked, -.50)
Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0
Use Plotters Built-in Font = unchecked
Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and its directory. If no font file is shown,
select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot.
Number of Pen = 0
Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008
Plotter Page Size = X- 999

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

453

Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin)

! Note: Page Size is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,
in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area
that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker
size when creating an NC file, the file will be blank.

Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

Tips
I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-91


There are 3 main steps to configuring the Gerber Cutter for use with the SGS
software: 1) Connecting the cutter, 2) Installing the Gerber software, 3)
Configuring the SGS programs.
Connect the cutter
The cutter must be assembled and installed.
Install the Gerber Software
Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter.
Configuring the SGS Software

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT.

454

Mark Manual

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.

In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

(Use = checked)
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional
Page Format = fixed scale
Options = Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1
Whole pieces in frame only
Check intersections before plotting
Optimize Plot/Cut Order
Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.
Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.
Format = Gerber Cutter
(0,0) in Page Center = unchecked
Manual Page Replace = unchecked
Use CR/LF in code = unchecked

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

455

*Use initialization in file header (M70) = checked


*Use bitefeed offset = checked, -. 50
Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0
Use Plotters Built-in Font = unchecked
Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and its directory. If no font file is shown,
select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot.
Number of Pen = 0
Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008
Plotter Page Size = X- 110
Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin)

! Note: Page Size is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,
in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area
that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker
size when creating an NC file, the file will be blank.

Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

Tips
I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter

456

Mark Manual

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-93


There are 3 main steps to configuring the Gerber Cutter for use with the SGS
software: 1) Connecting the cutter, 2) Installing the Gerber software, 3)
Configuring the SGS programs.
Connect the cutter
The cutter must be assembled and installed.
Install the Gerber Software
Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter.
Configuring the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Mark software

From the FILE menu, choose PLOT.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working
area.

In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

(Use = checked)
Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional
Page Format = fixed scale
Options = Set to Plot Continuous.
Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1
Whole pieces in frame only

Chapter 10: Output Devices Installation

457

Check intersections before plotting


Optimize Plot/Cut Order
Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.
The Plot Setting dialog box will display.
Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.
Format = Gerber Cutter
(0,0) in Page Center = unchecked
Manual Page Replace = unchecked
Use CR/LF in code = unchecked
*Use initialization in file header (M70) = checked
*Use bitefeed offset = checked, -. 50
Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots.
Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0
Use Plotters Built-in Font = unchecked
Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and its directory. If no font file is shown,
select Browse to locate the file.
Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot.
Number of Pen = 0

458

Mark Manual

Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008


Plotter Page Size = X- 110
Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin)

! Note: Page Size is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,
in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area
that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker
size when creating a NC file, the file will be blank.

Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

Tips
I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter

Chapter 11: Help Menu

459

Chapter 11: Help Menu


The Help menu provides general information and help regarding SGS
software.

Index (F1)
The Index command opens on-line help services provided by SGS. This is a
comprehensive guide to product information including a full glossary. This
command works like other on-line Help files; click on the desired topic to
view related information. Information may be viewed on screen or printed out
for future reference.
To access on-line Help:

From the Help Menu select Index or press F1.

The Command Summary screen will be displayed which offers a complete


listing of all the topics in the program. This on-line help program also includes
a Search command, which will search by topic, and a History command,
which will show a log of the recently viewed topics.

Keyboard
Select the Keyboard command to list an on-line help service. This option
displays all of the keyboard commands that can be used in OptiTex Mark. This
command works like other on-line Help files. Click on the desired topic and
the screen will be displayed. You can view the topics on screen or you can
print them for future reference.

Mark Manual

460

Using Help
Select Using Help to learn the basics of using the on line help program.

Check Plug Protection


The Check Plug Protection option is used to view the plug (key) number. It
may be necessary to look up this number when calling for technical support.
Check Plug Protection also shows the SGS modules that you are entitled to
use. Furthermore, when purchasing a new SGS module, the Check Plug
Protection box is used to enter the codes that activate the new module. In order
to activate a new module, click on the SET button to the right of the new
module listed in the Check Plug Protection dialog, and then enter the two
codes and click OK.

About OptiTex Mark


Choose the About OptiTex Mark command to find the version of software you
are currently using. This information is necessary when contacting Technical
Support for help with your SGS software.

SGS On-Line
This menu gives you the option to connect on-line to our home page to get
update information or connect the technical support department.
Your Internet browser will go directly to OptiTex home page when selecting
the SGS HOME PAGE or SGS SUPPORT PAGE from this menu.

Chapter 11: Help Menu

461

Send File
This function enables you to sand a file to any e-mail adders. You can sand it
to mailboxes in your company or around the world. An Internet access
required.
To send a file:

Choose the SEND FILE command from the HELP menu.

The E-MAIL dialog box appears.

Enter the e-mail address that you want to send the message to.

You have the option to attach more files and to add the message
name and subject.

Mark Manual

462

Click O.K.

The message with the attached files will be send to the desired
address

How to Contact SGS


SGS Israel for international sales marketing and technical support:
Scanvec Garment Systems (SGS)
Ravnitzky 6
Sgula Industrial Park
Petach-Tikva 49221, Israel
Tel.: 972-3-904-9979
Fax: 972-3-904-2710
SGS USA for inside the US sales and marketing:
ScanVec Garment Systems (SGS)
International Plaza Two, Suite 625
Philadelphia, PA 19113-1518, USA
Tel.: 610-521-5970
Toll free: (US & Canada) 877 RING OPTI
Fax: 610-521-1564
E-Mail: E-Mail Technical Support: support@optitex.com
E-Mail Sales & Marketing: sales@optitex.com
Web Site: http://www.optitex.com

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands

463

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands


Pull Down Menu Shortcut Keys
As you may already know many of the commands in the pull down menus
have shortcut keys that will activate them. Below you will find a summary of
those shortcut commands.
OptiMark Menu Commands

Activation Keys

File Menu:
File/New

Ctrl+N

File/Open Marker File

Ctrl+O

File/ Save Marker File

Ctrl+S

File/Exit Alt+F4
Piece Menu:
Piece/Information

Ctrl+I

Piece/Make Hole

Ctrl+H

Piece/Internals

Ctrl+E

Marker/Place Piece

Ctrl+P

Marker/Place one Set

Ctrl+Shift+P

Marker/Place All

Ctrl+Shift+Alt+P

Mark Manual

464

Marker Menu:
Marker/Clear Marker

Ctrl+C

Marker/Remove Marker

Delete or Ctrl+R

Marker/Duplicate marker

Ctrl+D

Alignment/Horizontal by Marker Center

Alt+Ctrl+M

Alignment/Horizontal by Upper Limit

Alt+Up

Alignment/Horizontal by Lower Limit

Alt+Down

Alignment/Horizontal by Piece Center

Alt+Ctrl+H

Alignment/Vertical by Left Limit

Alt+Left

Alignment/Vertical by Right Limit

Alt+Right

Alignment/Vertical by Piece Center

Alt+Ctrl+V

Marker/Marker Definitions

Ctrl+M

Marker/Placed Piece Cutter Ordering

Ctrl/click left mouse button.

Marker/Relate Piece to Stripes

Shift+Home

Marker/Undo

Ctrl+Z

Grouping Menu:
Stripe Adjust Group

Ctrl+G

Block Fuse

Ctrl+B

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands

Nesting Menu:
Compact Arrangement

Ctrl+J

Stop Batch Command

Ctrl+A

Help Menu:
Help/Index

F1

Other Shortcut keys


Listed below are many other shortcut keys. These shortcuts are not menu
commands, nor are they listed elsewhere in the program.
Return Piece to Piece Display Bar.

Double click on piece

Add and remove annotation descriptions


on pieces

Ctrl+T on the marker.

Fill Pieces on marker with color.

Ctrl+F

Place a piece more times than listed on


the Size List Box

Ctrl+P (enable minus-).

Aligning the selected piece with the center


of the closest placed piece on the marker.

Ctrl+L

Redraw Command.

Ctrl+Alt+R

Stop before cutting marked internal.

Ctrl+Alt+B

Define a piece as foldable in the Up & Down Ctrl+U

465

Mark Manual

466
Define a piece as not foldable

Ctrl+Q

Mirror Up

Enter

Mirror Right

Shift + Enter

Rotate 90

Right mouse button

Rotate 180

Right mouse button

Adjust Left

Alt+4

Adjust Up

Alt+8

Adjust Down

Alt+2

Adjust Right

Alt+6

Adjust Left-Up

Alt+7

Adjust Left-Down

Alt+1

Adjust Right-Down

Alt+3

Adjust Right-Up

Alt+9

Adjust Left 10 pixels at a time

Left Arrow

Adjust Right 10 pixels at a time

Right Arrow

Adjust Up 10 pixels at a time

Up Arrow

Adjust Down 10 pixels at a time

Down Arrow

Move overlapped pieces

Click right and left mouse


button simultaneously

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands

467

Tilt to the right F12


Tilt to the left

F11

Uses of the Right Mouse Button


The left mouse button is the most frequently used button in OptiMark. The
right mouse button is used very infrequently, but it can be used at times to
activate shortcut commands. They are listed as follows.

Rotating Pieces with the Mouse


If the appropriate options are selected in the Piece Info dialog box, the right
mouse button can be used to rotate a piece 2 way or 4 way. Place the piece on
the marker, move the cursors on top of the piece and click the right mouse
button once.
For more information on rotating pieces, refer to the Rotate command in the
Piece Menu chapter or the Rotate tool in the Tools chapter.

Rotating Pieces with the Rotate Tool


The right mouse button can be used with the Rotate Icon. Refer to the Rotate
tool in the Icons chapter or the Rotate command in the Piece menu for more
information about rotating pieces.

Moving Pieces with the Bump, Bump/Rotate, and Jump/Rotate


Tools
The right mouse button is used with the Bump, Bump/Rotate, and Jump/Rotate
Tools to place pieces. Refer to the Tools chapter to learn more about bumping
and jumping pieces on the marker.

Mark Manual

468

Moving Overlapped Pieces


Click the right and left mouse buttons simultaneously over an overlapped
piece. The overlapped piece will move directly to the right of the piece it is
overlapping.

Fabric Spreading Methods


To fold pieces in a marker, the correct spreading method must be defined in
the Marker Definitions command of the Marker menu. The usage of folded
pieces depends on the way the material has been spread. Single Ply will not
allow folded pieces. Tubular pieces can be folded on the upper or lower edges
of the marker. Tubular markers must have at least 2 plies. Faced pieces can be
folded on the right and left edges or the marker. Faced markers must have at
least 2 plies. Folded Pieces can be folded on the upper, lower, right, and left
edges of the marker. Folded markers must have at least 2 plies. If you wish to
fold pieces into quarters, you must have at least 4 plies.

! Note: For more information on spreading methods, refer to the Marker


Definitions section of the Marker chapter.

Defining Pieces as Foldable


Foldable pieces in the up and down directions will have the letter U beside
them. Foldable pieces in the left and right directions will have the letter S
beside them. To define pieces as foldable, use the Info or All Sizes Info
commands in the Piece menu or press Ctrl+U for up and down directions and
Ctrl+L for left and right directions. To define pieces as not foldable, use the
Info or All Sizes Info commands in the Piece menu or select the piece and
press Ctrl+Q.

! Note: Non-symmetric pieces can be defined as foldable.

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands

469

Placing Folded Pieces


Use the numeric keypad (make sure the NUM LOCK is on) to place folded
pieces. Press the desired number key while placing a folded piece. You can
only fold pieces taken from the Piece menu.

! Note: When double clicking the mouse cursor must be within the marker
area and the piece in the piece menu, NOT on the marker.
Fold along the top

double click + U or Up Arrow


(8) from key pad

Fold along the lower edge

double click + D or Down


Arrow (2) from key pad

Fold along the left edge

double click + L or (4)

Fold along the right edge

double click + R or (6)

Quartered piece in the Upper Left corner

double click + Home (7)

Quartered piece in the Lower Left corner

double click + End (1)

Quartered piece in the Upper Right corner

double click + PgUp (9)

Quartered piece in the Lower Right corner

double click + PgDn (3)

! Note: A folded piece cannot be part of a group. For more information on


creating and keeping groups, refer to the Group chapter.

Unfolding Pieces
To unfold a piece, double click on the placed, folded piece. The piece will be
returned to the menu. The piece can be replaced at anytime.

Mark Manual

470

Scroll Bars Automatic Utility


There is a new scroll bar automatic utility when you hold a piece on the
working area with the Hand Tool (drag tool), you can automatically move
the scroll bars. Dragging the piece on the working area while you hold the
piece will move automatically the two scroll bars (horizontal and vertical)
according to the piece location on the working area.

Creating a Group
Click and drag a box around the desired pieces on the marker, or press and
hold the Shift key and click to add other pieces to the group. A minimum of
two pieces is required to create a group.

! Tip: The pieces will move as a group until a different piece is selected. All
of the grouped pieces will move simultaneously by clicking inside
one of the grouped objects and dragging it to the desired location.
You can also use the Bump and Jump tools to reposition a group
anywhere on the marker. Most commands and tools that work on one
piece will also work on a group.

! Note: For more information on creating and keeping groups, refer to the
Group chapter.

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands

471

Shortcut Key Table:


Key

Special keys

Menu command

Description

Ctrl

File / New

Close the current


Marker and create a
new

Ctrl

File / Open

Open an existing
Marker

Ctrl

File / Save

Save the current


Marker

F4

Alt

File / Exit

Exit

Ctrl

Piece / Info...

Piece information
dialog

Ctrl

Piece / Make Hole

Enable nesting of
other pieces inside
selected piece

Ctrl

Piece / Internals

General Internal
element attributes

Ctrl

Piece / Place
Selected Pieces /
Place

Place the selected


pieces to Marker

Ctrl + Shift

Piece / Place
Selected Pieces /
Place One Set

Place one set of the


selected pieces

Mark Manual

472

Ctrl + Alt +
Shift

Piece / Place
Selected Pieces /
Place All

Place all allowed


selected pieces

Ctrl

Marker / Remove
Pieces

Remove selected
pieces from the
Marker

<Delete>
D

Ctrl

Marker / Duplicate

Duplicate the
selected pieces on
the Marker

Ctrl

Marker / Marker
Definitions...

Open Marker
definitions dialog

Ctrl

Marker / Undo

Undo the last


Marker action

<Home>

Shift

Marker / Relate
Piece to Stripes

Define the selected


piece position
relative to the
Stripes

Ctrl + Alt

Marker / Alignment
/ Horizontal by
Marker Center

Align the selected


pieces to marker
center

Ctrl + Alt

Marker / Alignment
/ Horizontal by
Piece Center

Horizontally Align
the selected pieces
to adjustment piece
center

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands

473

<Down arrow>

Alt

Marker /
Alignment /
Horizontal by
Down Limit

Horizontally Align
the selected pieces
to lower limit

<Up arrow>

Alt

Marker /
Alignment /
Horizontal by
Up Limit

Horizontally Align
the selected pieces
to upper limit

Ctrl + Alt

Marker /
Alignment /
Vertical by
Piece Center

Vertically Align the


selected pieces to
adjustment piece
center

<Left arrow>

Alt

Marker /
Alignment /
Vertical by Left
Limit

Vertically Align the


selected pieces to
left limit

Right arrow>

Alt

Marker /
Alignment /
Vertical by
Right Limit

Vertically Align the


selected pieces to
right limit

Ctrl

Grouping /
Block Fuse

Define a Fusing box


around a selected
Group

Ctrl

Nesting /
Compact
Arrangement

Run Squeeze

Mark Manual

474

Ctrl

<F1>

Nesting / Stop
Batch

Stop Batch File

Help / Index

Help

<F1>

Shift

Context Help

Ctrl

Allows Up/Down
side folding for
selected piece

Ctrl

Allows Left/Right
side folding for
selected piece

Ctrl

Disable folding for


selected piece

Ctrl + Alt

Redraw Marker

<Esc>

Cancel Marker
redraw

<F9>

Ctrl + Shift

Print screen

Ctrl + Alt

Enable OpStop on
the selected piece
On/Off

Ctrl

Fill placed pieces


with color On/Off

Ctrl

Display pieces
descriptions On/Off

Chapter 12: Shortcut Commands

475

<Down arrow>

Shift selected pieces


down

<Up arrow>

Shift selected pieces


up

<Left arrow>

Shift selected pieces


left

<Right
arr+A32ow>

Shift selected pieces


right

<F2>

Ctrl

<Enter>

Flip selected pieces


right

<F2>

Ctrl + Shift

Flip selected pieces


up

<Enter>

Shift

<F3>

Ctrl

Rotate selected
pieces 90 degrees

<F4>

Ctrl

Rotate selected
pieces 180 degrees

<F5>

Ctrl

Adjust left

<Num. 4>

Alt

<F6>

Ctrl

Adjust up

Mark Manual

476

<Num. 8>

Alt

<F7>

Ctrl

Adjust down

<Num. 2>

Alt

<F8>

Ctrl

Adjust right

<Num. 6>

Alt

<F9>

Ctrl

Adjust left - up

<Num. 7>

Alt

<F10>

Ctrl

Adjust left - down

<Num. 1>

Alt

<F11>

Ctrl

Adjust right - down

<Num. 3>

Alt

<F12>

Ctrl

Adjust right - up

<Num. 9>

Alt

Glossary Terms

477

Glossary Terms
AAMA
Refers to a neutral file format created by the American Apparel
Manufacturing Association.
About
Selecting the About icon on the Standard toolbar in OptiTex PDS or the
Marker toolbar in OptiTex Mark activates a dialog box displaying the version
of software currently in use.
Align
A command found in the Edit Menu of OptiTex PDS that repositions points
horizontally, vertically, or at an assigned angle based on the selection of two
or more points.
Array
A command found in the Marker Menu of OptiTex Mark, which allows
selected piece(s) to be arranged into rows and columns automatically on the
marker as specified in the Array dialog box.
Baseline
Baseline, also referred to as a grainline, controls the pattern pieces alignment
in the working area and on the marker.
Base Size
The pattern size from which the program bases pattern changes and grade.

Glossary Terms

478

Buffer
An assigned area of space placed on a single pattern or patterns in OptiTex
Mark. A buffer is often used to create extra space between pattern pieces when
cutting difficult fabrics.
Bundle
A pattern making term that refers to all patterns pieces necessary to make one
complete item or Set.
Click
The action of pressing down on the left mouse button to select an object or
command on the screen.
Clipboard
A location on the computer where items are stored when they are cut or copied
from a file or document. Items remain on the clipboard until another item is
cut or copied.
Contour
The perimeter of the pattern piece.
Cursor
The screen symbol (e.g. the arrow) that indicates the position of the mouse on
the computer screen.

Glossary Terms

479

Delta Value
This refers to the X and Y-axis used for directional movement on the working
area. The X-axis represents the horizontal movement and the Y-axis represents
the vertical movement.
Dialog Box
The pop-up window that appears while using editing tools allowing the user to
insert parameters for a specific command.
Digitizing
The process of converting a two-dimensional object into data points as digital
numbers, which are imputed into the computer to represent the pattern pieces.
Directory
User-defined sections on the computer were file could be stored. ( e. g.
C:\Optitex7\Examples).
Display File
A marker file, usually containing one or more design files, which has been
nested. (e.g. filename.dsp).
DXF
The graphical Data Exchange Format used by CAD systems to transfer
geometric information.
Drive
The address of the storage media to be accessed: usually A and B for
removable diskettes and C, D for permanent hard disk or CD-ROM drive.

Glossary Terms

480
DSN File

DSN is the SGS extension for a OptiTex PDS file.


DSP File
DSP is the SGS extension for a Mark file.
EXE
Extension denoting a program file. This is a compiled computer program
executable from DOS or from Windows by typing the file name on the
command line and pressing the Enter key (DOS) or by double click on its
name (Windows).
Exit
Normal termination of software program.
Field
The white spaces in a dialog box where information can be entered.
File Extension
The three letters suffix at the end of a filename, which defines the format. For
example: DSP, DSN, EXE, etc.
Flipping
The act of transposing the pattern piece horizontally or vertically while it is
located in the working area.

Glossary Terms

481

Global Rule
A grading rule based on the total number of grading points of any pattern.
Also called, All Points Rule.
Graded Pattern
A pattern that points have been assigned grading rules to control the way a
piece changes from size to another.
Grading
The process of assigning measurement increments to a pattern to determine
how each size of the pattern should increase or decrease in relation to the
previous size.
Grading Point
A point on the pattern contour, line and curve, which you can attach a grading
value.
Grading Rule
The assigned measurement increments to define the grading at a point on the
pattern piece for all sizes. There are three types of grading rules: fixed, point
and global.
Grading Table
A display window activated from the Grading Menu that displays the assigned
measurement increments for previously established grading rules.

Glossary Terms

482

Grainline
Grainline, also referred to as a baseline, controls the pattern pieces alignment
in the working area and on the marker.
Graphic Standard
The ASCII geometry in CAD/CAM file formats, which renders them
compatible with SGS programs.
Grayed Out
Refers to features or commands that are unavailable at the current time.
Features and commands are typically grayed out when a selected item on the
piece does not correspond to the feature or command.
Group
A term used in OptiTex Mark to describe two or more selected patterns that
have been added to the pattern list and nested on the marker as a single unit.
The Group is established by highlighting the pieces and selecting Keep in the
Grouping Menu of OptiTex Mark.
Handle Point
Any notch or button with the number 1.
Hard Drive
A device made of aluminum disks coated with iron oxide permanently
mounted in the computer to store data and programs. Hard disks have more
storage capacity than floppy disks.

Glossary Terms

483

Hex
Hexadecimal. A number written in base 16, which contains 16 possible digits:
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A (10), B (11), C (12), D (13), E (14) and F (15).
Icon
Icons are located on the toolbars and provide the pattern maker with fast
access to the design tools.
Internals
Lines or points which are not located on the contour, and which can be used
for style or cutting purposes.
Intersections
A term used in OptiTex Mark to describe the points where nested patterns
overlap on the marker area.
Invert
To relocate the first point on a selected line segment from one end the opposite
end. This command can be found in the Edit Menu of OptiTex PDS by
selecting Segment and Show.
Key
A small piece of hardware approximately 1.5 by 2 with 25 small prongs on
one end and 25 small inlets or holes on the other end. This key is plugged into
a parallel port on the back of the computer. If the computer has a printer
attached, the key is plugged into the back of the printer plug as if to piggyback
on the printer plugs. This item is what permits SGS software to run on your
computer. When this key is not plugged into the back of the computer, a
HASP plug not found error displays on the screen in the HASP Error

Glossary Terms

484

Message dialog box. Authorizer keys are designed to prevent illegal copying
and illegal use of software. An authorizer key is also referred to as, Plug,
Security Lock, Lock or Dangle.
Landscape Mode
The Landscape mode is the opposite of Portrait Mode in printer setup. It
allows output to be printed in the width direction of the paper.
Lock
See Key .
Marker
The physical layout of all the pieces in a style cut from the same material at
the same time.
Marker File
A file created in OptiTex Mark that contains a nested marker.
Marker Size
The dimensions of the marker that have been specified in the Marker
Definitions dialog box of the Marker Menu in OptiTex Mark.
Mirror
This command creates a symmetrical pattern piece by joining two pieces, the
original and a duplicate inverted piece, at a two-point line segment that is
selected before using the Mirror command from the Piece Menu in OptiTex
PDS.

Glossary Terms

485

Nest
A term used to indicate the close placement of pieces on a marker layout.
Network
A collection of devices such as computers and printers, that are connected
together. A network is a tool for communication that allows users to store and
retrieve information, share printers and exchange information.
Nested Pattern
A pattern that is drawn to show more than one size of the piece stacked on top
of each other also called a stacked piece or graded nest.
Nesting
The placement of pieces on a marker to achieve the most compact and
efficient layout.
Notch
A symbol placed on a pattern to indicate where the piece should be aligned
with another piece when the two are sewn together.
On-line Help
Help accessed by using either the F1 key for general index or Shift F1 keys for
specific help when an option or command is selected.
Order
An order is generated in OptiTex Mark to set up the marker. The order will
include information such as the design files to be nested on the marker, the
fabric width, and the number of each piece in the design file.

Glossary Terms

486
Output

Refers to data that is either printed or plotted.


Path
The alphanumeric code that guides the computer to a specific drive/
directory/file based on the default selection defined in Autoexec.bat file.
Piece Display Bar
Refers to a pictorial list of pieces within a design file. The Piece Display Bar
shows a small picture of each piece in a design file.
Piece List
A window that is activated from the Display Menu in OptiTex PDS and
displays the pattern pieces for the current design file.
Plot File
A file created for printing purposes. The resulting plot file can be sent to the
output device from any PC (not necessarily equipped with SGS software) with
the DOS Copy command.
Point
The part of a pieces boundary lines used to control the shape of the piece. A
point may be a grading point or a non-grading point.
Point Rule
A rule, which is attached to a specific point and is related to the number of
sizes which are currently open, and only to those sizes.

Glossary Terms

487

Polyline
Contour elements with shared attributes. (See also Single Elements).
Pop-up Menu
A list of options that appear on the screen after the right mouse button is
clicked.
Pop-up Window
A window displayed on the working area as a result of user selected option.
Portrait Mode
The Portrait Mode is the opposite of Landscape Mode in printer setup. It
allows output to be printed in a lengthwise direction on the paper.
Remainders
The number of unplaced pieces in a marker file.
Right Mouse Click
The action of pressing down on the right mouse button to select an object or
command on the screen.
Round
The act of modifying an angle into a curve.
Rule Library
A collection of existing grading rules which can be attached to a pattern.

Glossary Terms

488

Scroll
When the number of items in a window/dialog box exceeds the amount of
space for display, an elevator bar appears at the right. By positioning the
mouse on this bar, the user can view all items at one window height.
Security Lock
See Key .
Selected Piece
The piece displayed in the working area with a dashed line around the piece
perimeter.
Selection Tool
The screen symbol (e.g. the arrow) that indicates the position of the mouse on
the computer screen.
Set
A pattern making term that refers to all pattern pieces necessary to make one
complete item or Bundle.
Shrink Factor
The amount a pattern is increased or decreased to allow for the dimensional of
the fabric.
Size List
The box displaying all sizes being produced for a specific design file.

Glossary Terms

489

Snap
When using a grid on the working area in OptiTex PDS, this option causes the
cursor to jump to the nearest point, whether it be a contour point, grid point or
pieces end point (grid points have priority).
Solution File
A completed order of nested patterns.
Stack Point
One point on a nested pattern where the grading is set at 0,0 for all sizes in the
nest.
Swap Pieces
This icon in OptiTex PDS interchanges the original pattern piece in the piece
display bar with the piece being edited in the working area.
Toggle
Refers to the action of turning a command on/off by checking or unchecking
an item. For example, many options in the Display Menu toggle between
displaying on screen or not displaying on screen.
Tolerance Value
The maximum distance between two points on a contour to treat the points as a
single point.
Toolbar
A collection of icons positioned in a row on the screen. Toolbars provide easy
access to commands and features when using the mouse.

Glossary Terms

490
Tools

Design functions in the software that enables the patternmaker to manipulate


patterns.
Waste Limits
This area is created on the markers edge prevents the cutting of pieces were
the fabric in flawed. The area can be defined in the Marker Menu under
Marker Definitions.
Working Area
The area of the screen where pattern pieces are placed for editing.
WYSIWYG
This stands for, What You See Is What You Get. This concept is used in the
SGS software to indicate that what appears on the computer screen is what
will be printed or plotted onto paper.
X, Y Coordinates
A method of defining the horizontal (x) and vertical (y) location of grade
points, notch attributes, and internals.

Index
A
Add Point, 176
All, 191
Apply, 183
Area/Perimeter, 188
Arrows, 182
About OptiTex PDS, 23
All Sizes, 36
Arrow/Selection Tool, 21
Alert on Start, 134
Annotation, 104, 122
Alignment, 212
Area Usage, 230
Auto Save of Markers, 294
AutoNest Queue, 311
Autonesting of Selected Pieces, 291
Autonesting Setup, 292
B
Buffer, 178
Buffering, 162
Base Size Mark, 105, 122
Best Quality, 105, 123
Boundary Lines, 119
Browse, 99
Bulge (Corde Error) Inches, 148
Bump, 37, 42
Batch Commands:, 302
Batch Messages, 311
Browse, 295
Block Fuse, 253
Baseline, 26
C
Code, 161,204
Current, 188
Current Type, 191
Cad Files to Import, 110
Change Log, 136
Chapter 4 File Menu, 71
Copies, 135
Create NST-file (cncKad) too, 99
Current Plotter, 149

Curve Points, 120


Context Help, 23
Check Current Solution, 221
Clear Marker (Ctrl+C), 202
Columns, 210
Copy Marker, 208
Current Trace, 228
Colors According to Sets, 258
cut, 261
Continue, 289
Continue Batch, 311
Create NST-file (cncKad) too, 296
D
Delete, 183
Delete a Piece:, 170
Delete Point, 177
Description, 161
Default Font Size (Inches), 142
Dictionary Dialog Box, 121
Drill Holes, 120
Depth, 30
Disengaging a Tool, 20
Delete Unused, 220
Description, 204
Detect Intersections, 221
Duplicate (Ctrl+D), 208
Display Pieces on Marker, 257
Duplicate Marker, 296
E
Edit Piece, 174
Edit Notch Dialog Box, 30
Engaging a Tool, 19
Exit (Alt+F4), 157
Export to CAD/CAM Files, 100
Enable Multiple Cutting of Segments, 197
Enable Quality Overflow, 211
Ending Point, 228
F
Flip, 176, 205
Flip Vertically, 171, 172
File Format, 110, 111

Index
File Name and Browse, 134
Find now, 88
Finder Dialog, 86
Format, 102, 119, 138
Fill with Color (Ctrl+F), 258
Fabric Pattern, 233
Faced (LR), 200
G
Gap After Plotting, 141
Grain (Base) Lines, 120
Global Change Internal s Dialog Box, 190
Global Change Internals Parameters, 189
Global Info, 168
Global Set, 188
H
Hole and Contour, 189
Holes and Internal Contours, 185
Hide Stripes, 263
Horizontal by Marker Center, 212
History, 74, 75, 76
I
Info (Ctrl+I), 159
Internal Text, 170
Internals (Ctrl+E), 180
Inverse, 183
Ignore CR. / LF, 116
Ignore Frame, 116
Internals By Tools, 261
Ignore Internals, 112
Import from CAD/CAM Files, 108
Internal Cut, 120
Internal Lines (draw), 120
J
Join Pieces, 174
L
Layers Table Dialog Box, 119
Look in subfolders, 87

Length Depth Radius, 181


Legal Intersection, 207
Length, 199
M
Make Hole (Ctrl+H), 173
Max Tilt, 164
Mirror, 176
Mode,33, 181
Move Point, 178
Make DSN files, 111
Measure, 27, 28
Manual Page Replace, 139
Marker Boundary, 146
Marker Header, 146
Marker, 234
Marker Definitions (Ctrl+M), 197
Marker Menu, 197
Match case, 88
Match whole word only, 88
Material, 111
Material Code, 105, 122
Material filter, 87
Max Grade Angle, 115
Merge Few Markers, 74
Min. Plot Spline Segment, 141
Minimal Plot/Cut line, 141
Marker Full Length, 263
N
Name, 138
Network Plotting, 134
New (Ctrl+N),21, 71
No Size, 111
Notches, 120,260
Note, 136
Number of Pens, 145
Nest++, 293
Nesting Menu, 289
No.of plies reserved, 206
Number of Plies, 199, 231
O
Operation Stop,31, 182

Index
Original, 176
Open Design Files, 77
Open file, 88
Open Marker File (Ctrl + O), 71
Open Style File, 91
Order by Tools, 147
Orientation, 105, 123
Output Manager INI File, 149
Optimize Cutter Ordering, 223

Piece Parameters, 203


Placed Piece Cutter Order, 226
Placement on marker, 205
Piece Description, 259
Points (Buttons), 260
Q

O Page in Center, 139

Quality Lines, 121


Quantity, 105, 111, 122,161
Quality, 261

Pieces, 190
Place (CTRL+P), 191
Place All (CTRL+SHIFT+ALT+P), 192
Place Folded Down, 194
Place Folded Left, 192
Place Folded Right, 193
Place Folded Up, 193
Place Left Down, 195
Place Left Up, 194
Place One Set (CTRL+SHIFT+P), 192
Place right Down, 196
Place Right Up, 195
Plies, 161
Print Report, 164, 167
Piece Description, 36
Pointer, 21
Piece Code, 104, 122
Piece Code filter, 87
Piece Name, 104, 122, 161
Piece name filter, 87
Plot, 123, 124
Plot Continuous, 146
Plot Setting Dialog Box, 137
Plotter (Output Manager) Setup, 124
Plotter Font File, 142
Plotter Page Size (inches), 140
Plotter Setting, 137
Print,150 299, 300
Print All, 300
Pattern Height (Y Value), 239
Performing Optimum Calculations:, 229
Piece Name, 204

Remainders, 162
Rotate, 176, 178
Radius, 33
Redraw, 25
Rotate by 90 or 180, 40
Rotate from Center, 41
Rotate from Specific Point, 41
Remove on End, 135
Report, 93
Report to Log, 136
Restore Defaults, 105, 121, 123
Relate Piece to Stripes (Shift+Home), 243
Remove (DELor CTRL+R), 202
Replace Pieces on Marker, 215
Rotate, 205
S
Save, 22
Show Cut/Plot Ordering, 36
Stop, 25, 289
Save (Ctrl + S), 95
Save As, 95
Save as Type, 97
Save Current Nesting, 97
Save only nested parts (and zero remainders), 100
Scale Factor, 146
Scale Factor Unit, 102
select, 89
Setup, 112
Sew Lines, 120
Show file name only, 87
Size Name, 104, 122, 204, 259

Index
Spline Angle, 115
Style file name, 86,88
Style Name, 122
Save only nested parts (and zero remainders), 296
Selected Design File, 299
Solutions Report Details dialog box, 299
Solutions Reports, 297
Start Batch, 300
Stop Batch, 310
Sequence, 189
Set Sequence #, 182
Set Size, 191
Show Numbers, 182
Sort, 182
Stripe Adjust Number, 181
Sequence Number During Cutting, 227
Singular, 199
Starting Point, 228
Stop before cutting, 207
Stripe Adjust According To Set Only, 241
Stripe Definition, 239
Stripes Definitions Dialog Box, 240
Substitute, 217
Show Cut/Plot Ordering, 263
Show Pieces List, 266

To Edit a Notch:, 29
To Rotate from a Specific Point On the Selected
Piece(s):, 41
To Rotate a Piece within the Marker:, 179
To Rotate a Source Piece:, 179
To Set All Sizes Info:, 167
To Set Global Info for all Sizes on All Pieces:, 169
To Edit a Selected Piece:, 175
To Continue Nesting:, 289
To Create a Batch File, 302
To Start a Batch, 301
To Start Auto-Nest, 290
To View and print the log file, 297
Total, 298
To Cut a Piece:, 177
To Edit a Selected Piece:, 175
To Flip an Image Horizontally:, 172

To Merge Marker Files:, 74


To Output Using the OutMan Print Manager:, 126
Tolerance, 113
Turn (Grade) Points, 119
To Define Stripes:, 239
To Optimize the Piece:, 226
To Relate Pieces (With Stripe Adjust Notches Or
Buttons) To a Stripe:, 244
To Replace Pieces, 215
Tool, 228
Tubular (UD), 200
Type of Material, 201
Text, 33
To Add a Button:, 31
To Add a Notch:, 28
To Add Internal Text To a Piece:, 34
To Delete a Notch:, 28
To Edit a Button:, 32

Vertical by Piece Center, 215

U
Update, 91
Use <M70> in File Header, 140
Use Bite Offset, 140
Use CL/LF in Code, 140
Use Output Manager, 134, 148
Use Plotters Built in Fonts, 142

W
Write Reports to file, 99, 296
Width,30 199
Working Units, 247

X
X, 240
X End, 200
X Origin, 200
Y
Y, 240
Y End, 200

Index
Y Origin, 200
Z
Zoom In, 26
Zoom all Pieces on Marker, 264

Potrebbero piacerti anche